Sunteți pe pagina 1din 370

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals


Release: 18.0 PC2 Document Revision: 18.03

www.nortel.com

411-9001-063 .

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Release: 18.0 PC2 Publication: 411-9001-063 Document release date: 22 January 2010 Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved. While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Contents
New in this release
Features 9 Abis over IP on BTS S8000 / S12000 (34967) 9 V18 support for GSM-R (35095) 10 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna (35147) 10

Introduction Chapter 1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 introduction


1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 S8000 S8002 S8003 S8006 BTS introduction 13 Outdoor BTS introduction 14 Indoor BTS introduction 14 Outdoor BTS introduction 15

11 13

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture presentation 17 2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture 24 2.2.1 BCF functional architecture 24 2.2.2 CBCF functional architecture 39 2.2.3 DRX functional architecture 44 2.2.4 eDRX/eDRX2 functional architecture 57 2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture 68 2.3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS architecture presentation 68 2.3.2 S8000 Indoor BTS architecture presentation 74 2.3.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS architecture presentation 84 2.3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS architecture presentation 86 2.3.5 S8006 Outdoor BTS architecture presentation 90 2.3.6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS additional equipment presentation 2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling 105 2.4.1 Connector plates 105 2.4.2 Internal cabling 112 2.4.3 External cabling 169 2.4.4 Inter-cabinet cabling 176

17

92

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristic s 181


3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics 181 3.1.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS dimensions 181 3.1.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS weight 181 3.1.3 S8000 Outdoor BTS operating temperature 181 3.1.4 S8000 Outdoor BTS climatic system 182 3.1.5 S8000 Outdoor BTS plinth 195 3.2 S8000 Indoor BTS physical characteristics 196 3.2.1 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet dimensions 196 3.2.2 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet dimensions 197 3.2.3 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet weight 197 3.2.4 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet weight 197 3.2.5 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet operating temperature 197 3.2.6 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet operating temperature 197 3.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics 200 3.3.1 S8002 Outdoor BTS dimensions 200 3.3.2 S8002 Outdoor BTS weight 200 3.3.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS operating temperature 200 3.3.4 S8002 Outdoor BTS climatic system 200 3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS physical characteristics 201 3.4.1 S8003 Indoor BTS dimensions 202 3.4.2 S8003 Indoor BTS weight 202 3.4.3 S8003 Indoor BTS operating temperature 202 3.5 S8006 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics 204 3.5.1 S8006 Outdoor BTS dimensions 205 3.5.2 S8006 Outdoor BTS weight 205 3.5.3 S8006 Outdoor BTS operating temperature 205 3.5.4 S8006 Outdoor BTS climatic system 205

Chapter 4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 electrical characteristic s 211


4.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS electrical characteristics 211 4.1.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply 211 4.1.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS power consumption 211 4.1.3 S8000 Outdoor BTS power system 211 4.1.4 S8000 Outdoor BTS internal battery autonomy 212 4.2 S8000 Indoor BTS electrical characteristics 212 4.2.1 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet power supply 212 4.2.2 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet power supply 212 4.2.3 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet power consumption 212 4.2.4 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet power consumption 212 4.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS electrical characteristics 212

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5 S8002 Outdoor BTS power supply 212 S8002 Outdoor BTS power consumption 212 S8002 Outdoor BTS internal battery autonomy 212 S8002 Outdoor BTS battery voltage thresholds and associated switches 212 4.4 S8003 Indoor BTS electrical characteristics 213 4.4.1 S8003 Indoor BTS power supply 213 4.4.2 S8003 Indoor BTS power consumption 213 4.5 S8006 Outoor BTS electrical characteristics 213 4.5.1 S8006 Outdoor BTS power supply 213 4.5.2 S8006 Outdoor BTS power consumption 213 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description


5.1 Power amplifier (PA) 215 5.1.1 Functional description 215 5.1.2 Physical description 216 5.2 ALCO board 221 5.2.1 Functional description 221 5.2.2 Physical description 224 5.3 RECAL board 226 5.3.1 Functional description 226 5.3.2 Physical description 228 5.4 ALPRO board 232 5.4.1 Functional description 232 5.4.2 Physical description 233 5.5 F-type converter 235 5.5.1 Functional description 235 5.5.2 Physical description 235 5.6 RF Combiner 237 5.6.1 Functional description 237 5.6.2 Physical description 245 5.7 Tx-Filter module 252 5.7.1 Functional description 252 5.7.2 Physical description 253 5.8 BCF unit 254 5.8.1 Functional description 254 5.8.2 Physical description 255 5.8.3 Mapping of CBCF functions to BCF functions 255 5.9 PCMI board of the BCF unit 256 5.9.1 Functional description 256 5.9.2 Physical description 256 5.10 GTW board of the BCF unit 259 5.10.1 Functional description 259

215

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6 5.10.2 Physical description 260 5.11 CSWM board of the BCF unit 262 5.11.1 Functional description 262 5.11.2 Physical description 263 5.12 DSC board of the BCF unit 267 5.12.1 Functional description 267 5.12.2 Physical description 268 5.13 SYNC board of the BCF unit 269 5.13.1 Functional description 269 5.13.2 Physical description 273 5.14 BCF converter of the BCF unit 274 5.14.1 Functional description 274 5.14.2 Physical description 275 5.15 PSCMD board of the BCF unit 276 5.15.1 Functional description 276 5.15.2 Physical description 277 5.16 Compact BCF (CBCF) module 279 5.16.1 Functional description 280 5.16.2 Physical description 280 5.16.3 Mapping of BCF functions to CBCF functions 281 5.17 CPCMI board of the CBCF module 283 5.17.1 Functional description 284 5.17.2 Physical description 285 5.18 CMCF board of the CBCF module 291 5.18.1 Functional description 292 5.18.2 Physical description 292 5.19 BCFICO board of the CBCF module 297 5.19.1 Functional description 297 5.19.2 Physical description 297 5.20 CBCF Back panel (CBP) of the CBCF module 302 5.20.1 Functional description 302 5.20.2 Physical description 302 5.21 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 module 303 5.21.1 Functional description 303 5.21.2 Physical description 304 5.22 RX-splitter 311 5.22.1 Functional description 311 5.22.2 Physical description 311 5.23 Power system: Energy Supply Module (ESM) (five-rectifier type) 5.23.1 Functional description 314 5.23.2 Physical description 314 5.24 Power system (six-rectifier type) 317 5.24.1 Functional description 317 5.24.2 Physical description 317
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

314

7 5.25 Power system (seven-rectifier type) 323 5.25.1 Functional description 323 5.25.2 Physical description 323 5.26 GSM Integrated Power System (GIPS) 328 5.26.1 Functional description 328 5.26.2 Physical description 329 5.27 Rectifier 332 5.27.1 Functional description 332 5.27.2 Physical description 333 5.28 Battery remote controller 336 5.28.1 Functional description 336 5.28.2 Physical description 337 5.29 Paging capacity increase - UI mode 337 5.30 Band support on GSM-R BTS 339 5.31 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER 340 5.31.1 Functional description 340 5.31.2 Physical description 340

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description


6.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software presentation 347 6.1.1 Downloadable files 347 6.1.2 PROM 347 6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions 351 6.2.1 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 software functions 352 6.2.2 BCF software functions 356 6.2.3 CBCF software functions 358 6.2.4 TIL software functions 360 6.2.5 TML IPM web server 360

347

Chapter 7 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna


7.1 Functional description 363 7.2 Specification 364 7.2.1 Behavior during the cell (BTS) lock/unlock 365 7.2.2 Behavior when the specified TEI goes down 366 7.2.3 Behavior when the specified TEI comes up 366 7.2.4 Behavior when no TEI is specified (empty value at MMI) 366 7.2.5 Behavior when invalid TEI is specified on the MMI 366 7.3 Feature locking 366

363

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

New in this release


The following sections detail what is new in Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals (411-9001-063) for release V18 P&C 2.

Features

Features (page 9)

See the following section for information about feature changes:

Abis over IP on BTS S8000 / S12000 (34967) V18 support for GSM-R (35095) GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna (35147)

Abis over IP on BTS S8000 / S12000 (34967)

This feature allows an S8000 BTS or an S12000 BTS to connect to the BSC using an Abis interface that runs over a packetized IP network. Abis over IP on BTS S8000 / S12000 impacts this document through the following:

Updated subsection User compartment (page 68) of the section 2.3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS architecture presentation (page 68). Added subsection 2.3.6.2 (R)IPM-USER in a 19-inch shelf (S8000 Indoor BTS option) (page 96) of the section 2.3.6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS additional equipment presentation (page 92). Added Figure 86 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Abis over IP cabling" (page 158). Added Figure 90 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Abis cabling (Isometric View)" (page 162). Added section 5.31 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER (page 340).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

10 New in this release

Added subsection 5.31.1 Functional description (page 340). Added subsection 5.31.2 Physical description (page 340). Added Figure 170 "IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module" (page 342).

Added Figure 172 "Software functions (with CBCF)" (page 354). Added section 6.2.5 TML IPM web server (page 360).

V18 support for GSM-R (35095)

This feature indicates that the V18.0 release supports the GSM-R application provided that the BTSs should remain in V16.0. V18 support for GSM-R impacts this document through the following:

1.1 S8000 BTS introduction (page 13) 1.2 S8002 Outdoor BTS introduction (page 14) 1.3 S8003 Indoor BTS introduction (page 14)

GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna (35147)

This feature addresses the impacts for the GSM BCCH TDMA mapping to a GSM band TRX, when the GSM 900 band TRX and a UMTS 900 band TRX are sharing a single antenna. GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna impacts this document through the following:

Chapter 7 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna (page 363) added section 7.3 Feature locking (page 366)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

11

Introduction
This document describes the S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006 base transceiver stations (BTS): part of the Nortel portfolio BTSs. The S8000 with Control and Switching Module (CSWM), with BCF for example, has a V16 software whereas the system release is V18.

Prerequisites

It is recommended that the readers also become familiar with the following technical document:

Navigation

Nortel GSM BSS Overview (411-9001-001)

Chapter 1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 introduction (page 13) briefly presents the S8000, S8002, S8003, and S8006 BTSs. Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture (page 17) deals with the architecture of the S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS, split into:

Architecture presentation Functional architecture Hardware architecture Cabling

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics (page 181) presents the physical characteristics (dimensions, weight, operating, temperature, batteries, climatic system) of the S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS. Chapter 4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 electrical characteristics (page 211) presents the electrical characteristics of the S8000/S8002/S8003/ S8006 BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

12 Introduction

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description (page 215) describes all the hardware components of the S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS. Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description (page 347) describes the software components of the S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS. Chapter 7 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna (page 363) gives information about the principles, functional description, and 7.3 Feature locking (page 366).

Dimensioning

For the dimensioning rules, see the GSM/GPRS/EDGE BSS Engineering Rules (PE/DCL/DD/138).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

13

Chapter 1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 introduction


1.1 S8000 BTS introduction
Specifically designed for outdoor/indoor installation, the S8000 Outdoor/Indoor Base Transceiver Station (BTS) is a complete solution for macrocellular voice and data applications that can deliver the high-capacity needed in cities as well as wide-coverage in remote rural areas. The S8000 BTS is also a platform for future data evolution of GSM networks ready to support GPRS and future EDGE services. The S8000 BTS supports the GSM-R application in the BSS releases V15.1R, V16.0, V18.0, and P&C1 provided that all the BTSs remains in V16.0. The S8000 BTS uses the latest technology to provide operators with:

high capacity accommodating up to eight TRXs for each cabinet and 24 TRXs for each site in an optimized and dense packaging. best-in-class radio performance thanks to high receive sensitivity receivers, unique interference cancellation and improved spatial diversity algorithms along with high output power, providing optimum coverage and link quality for both data and voice services. high modularity concept due to high integration of advanced technology. This in turn contributes to a significant reduction in required floor space, size and equipment operating costs. This concept is adapted to environmental constraints and is leading to the best economic trade-off between initial and final capacity. spectrum efficiency optimization with the support of the undisputed Nortel capacity features that provide high quality voice and data services to a dense subscriber population in a limited spectrum and at competitive cost. These solutions include Fractional Frequency Reuse, Automated Cell Tiering, and future Adaptive Multi-rate (AMR) evolution. industry leading transmission solution including high signaling concentration on the Abis and drop and insert capability.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

14 Chapter 1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 introduction

The S8000 BTS product is designed for full growth capability of up to eight TRXs for each cell in a sectorial configuration or 16 TRXs in an omnidirectional site.

1.2 S8002 Outdoor BTS introduction

Specifically designed for outdoor installation within the Railway GSM market, the S8002 Outdoor Base Station takes advantage, in particular, of: improved performance (very high receive sensitivity and immunity from interference), new features (enhanced full-rate coding and extended GSM bands) and sophisticated handover and frequency re-use algorithms, optimizing the coverage and the spectrum efficiency of the system. packaging and modularity concept due to high integration of advanced technology. This in turn contributes to a significant reduction in required floor space, size and equipment operating costs. This concept is adapted to environmental constraints.

This product is designed and optimized for applications such O2 BTS configurations, required in majority by the railway market. The S80002 BTS supports the GSM-R application in the BSS releases V15.1R, V16.0, V18.0, and V18 P&C1 provided that all the BTSs remains in V16.0

1.3 S8003 Indoor BTS introduction

Specifically designed for indoor installation, the S8003 Indoor Base Transceiver Station (BTS) is a complete solution for macrocellular voice and data applications that can deliver the high-capacity needed in cities as well as wide-coverage in remote rural areas. The S8003 BTS is also a platform for future data evolution of GSM networks ready to support GPRS and future EDGE services. The S8003 BTS supports the GSM-R application in the BSS releases V15.1R, V16.0, V18.0, and V18 P&C1 provided that all the BTSs remains in V16.0. The S8003 BTS uses the latest technology to provide operators with:

high capacity accommodating up to three DRXs for each cabinet in an optimized and dense packaging. best-in-class radio performance thanks to high receive sensitivity receivers, unique interference cancellation and improved spatial diversity algorithms along with high output power, providing optimum coverage and link quality for both data and voice services. high modularity concept due to high integration of advanced technology. This in turn contributes to a significant reduction in required floor space, size and equipment operating costs. This concept

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

1.4 S8006 Outdoor BTS introduction 15

is adapted to environmental constraints and is leading to the best economic trade-off between initial and final capacity.

spectrum efficiency optimization with the support of the undisputed Nortel capacity features that provide high quality voice and data services to a dense subscriber population in a limited spectrum and at competitive cost. These solutions include Fractional Frequency Reuse, Automated Cell Tiering and future AMR evolution. industry leading transmission solution including high signaling concentration on the Abis and drop and insert capability.

1.4 S8006 Outdoor BTS introduction

Specifically designed for outdoor installation, the S8006 Outdoor Base Transceiver Station takes advantage, in particular, of: improved performance (very high receive sensitivity and immunity from interference), new features (enhanced full-rate coding and extended GSM bands) and sophisticated handover and frequency re-use algorithms, optimizing the coverage and the spectrum efficiency of the system. packaging and modularity concept due to high integration of advanced technology. This in turn contributes to a significant reduction in required floor space, size and equipment operating costs. This concept is adapted to environmental constraints.

This product is designed and optimized optimized for deployment in a variety of street locations, with regards to specific dimensions compared to the other Nortel BTS products.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

16 Chapter 1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 introduction

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

17

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture


WARNING
The S8000 with CSWM (with BCF for example) has a V16 software whereas the system release is V18.

This paragraph provides an overview of the BTS physical architecture. The BTS components are described in detail in Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description (page 215) The EDGE link quality measurement (LQM) of the uplink is performed at the BTS. eDRX and E-PA are necessary on the BTS to utilize the EDGE features. BSC 3000 is required to utilize the EDGE features.

2.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture presentation

The BTS contains three main subsystems, see Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description (page 215), Subsystem architecture with BCF, and Figure 1 "Subsystem architecture with CBCF" (page 20):

one BCF (Cabinet or Unit) or one CBCF Module one TRX subsystem one coupling system

The content of each subsystem is listed in the following table:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

18 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Table 1 BTS subsystems Subsystem Base Common Function (BCF) Cabinet or Unit ** Contents*

Compact BCF (CBCF) Module **

TRX

Control and Switching Module (CSWM) Data signaling Concentration board (DSC) PCM Interface board (PCMI) Synchronization board (SYNC) Alarm Collecting board (ALCO) Gateway (GTW) Compact PCM Interface board (CPCMI) Compact Main Common Function board (CMCF) Remote Control Alarm (RECAL) board BCF Interconnection board (BCFICO) CBCF Back panel (CBP) Driver and Receiver unit (DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3) Power Amplifier (PA) RF Combiner Module(s) of the following types: Duplexer (D) Hybrid Two-way (H2D) Hybrid Four-way (H4D) Tx Filter(s) (TxF) eight-way cavity combiner (CC8)

Coupling system

Rx Splitter(s) LNA Splitter

* The number of boards or modules is not indicated and depends on the configuration of a site. ** The BTS contains a BCF or a CBCF. ***The eDRX2 is only applicable for GSM 900 to BTS S8000 equipped with a CBCF module and to BTS S8003.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture presentation

19

The following buses, which connect BTS components, are described in this section:

Frequency hopping (FH) bus Private PCM GSM Time bus Internal PCM bus O and M bus

The GSM Time bus, Internal PCM bus, and O and M bus are used only with the BCF Unit. Subsystem architecture with BCF shows the internal buses used with the BCF Unit and Figure 1 "Subsystem architecture with CBCF" (page 20) shows the buses used with the CBCF Module.

FH bus

The FH bus links together all logical DRXs or eDRXs or eDRX2s or DRX-ND3s. The FH bus and the transmitters connected to it ensure the function of frequency hopping and the filling of the BCCH frequency. The FH bus is a V11 (series) bus. It is one-way and carries the signals according to the RS485 standard.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

20 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 1 Subsystem architecture with CBCF

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture presentation

21

Each message is transmitted in synchronization with the 4Fbit clock and includes the following:

the system time in six bytes (flag included) the address of the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 that transmits the information in one byte the code of the send frequency on 10 bits the send power commands in one byte the NRZ message of the send data in 19 bytes

Up to 16 transmitters can be connected to this bus. For multi-cell sites, all the cells can be connected onto a single FH bus or there may be one FH bus for each cell, depending on the capacity of the site.

Private PCM

Up to six private PCMs transport data between the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 and the BCF unit or CBCF module. Each Private PCM supports up to four DRXs or e -DRXs or eDRX2s or DRX-ND3s. Each Private PCM has a 64 kbit/s time slot (TS) distributed to all DRXs or eDRXs or eDRX2s or DRX-ND3s and carries the GSM TIME signal (TS31). Each private PCM allocates the following time slots (TS) for each DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3:

three TSs (64 kbit/s logical channels) of transparent data (traffic/signaling) one TS (64 kbit/s logical channel) processed by the gateway for the OampM channel, an adaptation of the O&M bus of the CSWM card

A group of six TSs, three of which are used, is allocated to each DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3, as follows:
Traffic 1 Traffic 2 O&M TX OML/RSL 3 4 5 6

TS 0 of the Private PCM is reserved for tests and supports no transmission channel. A 4.096 MHz clock, slaved to the 4Fbit clock of the synchronization board, is used for bit synchronization of the Private PCM.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

22 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

The O and M channel

The O&M channel, not availabale with the COAM version of the BTS, is carried by a TS of the private PCM and supports O&M data of the TXs. It is a duplex two-way channel. Each TX has its own O&M channel, present on the only private PCM that links the TX to the gateway. The private PCM TS number of the O&M channel of a DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 is unvarying in a given gateway configuration. This TS number acts as the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 address for the gateway/DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 link. O&M data are sent only on the O&M channel of the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 selected on the bus. Only the data received on this O&M channel are redirected to the O&M bus.

The GSM TIME channel

This one-way logical channel transports the GSM time signal to each DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3. It is carried by bit 7 of TS 31 of the private PCM. The transmission speed of the resulting transmission channel is 8 kbit/s. A correction value is sent to each DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 over the OML link of the private PCM. This value corresponds to the delays caused by propagation. Each DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 can therefore locally regenerate a synchronous GSM TIME bus with the BCF subsystem bus. The refresh period must be a multiple of an occurrence between the GSM time base (577 s) and the PCM time base (125 s). The selected refresh period is 60 ms. Such a 60-ms frame contains three parts:
Synchronization flag Useful data Filler bits

GSM TIME bus Principle

The GSM Time bus is a V11 serial bus used in the BCF Unit to link the SYNC and GTW boards. The data it conveys define the "local BTS time". The serial format includes a flag to detect any break in the link. Moreover it provides a "strobe" every 577 s that accurately matches the start of each time slot.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture presentation

23

Interface signals

The GSM TIME bus supports three types of signals. These three signals, which are generated by the synchronization unit, are transmitted in differential mode.

Internal PCM bus Principle

The V11 bus is located between the switching matrix and the following units:

PCM Interface units (PCMI) Data Signaling Concentration units (DSC) GaTeWays (GTW)

The 16 internal PCMs are synchronous links at 2 Mbit/s on which the data are organized in 125-s frames divided into 32 time slots of eight bits each. A PCM is a time division multiplexed link that supports 32 channels with a throughput of 64 kbit/s.

Interface signals
MICR MICE SY H4M

The signals used are the following:


: Receive PCM in master-to-slave direction : Transmit PCM in slave-to-master direction : 8 kHz negative frame synchronization pulse : 4.096 MHz timing clock

O and M bus Principle

The O&M bus is a V11 asynchronous master-slave type bus that is subject to physical addressing. It interconnects all units of the BCF subsystem and the TXs through the private PCM between the GTW and the DRXs. The CSWM acts as master. The bus enables users to do the following:

set up the initial configuration and reset it measure and control system status retrieve alarms force each bus subscriber to "RESET" status

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

24 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Interface signals

The O&M bus is used in the BCF and originates from the CSWM card. Due to its low rate (9600 bit/s), this bus is not matched. The O&M bus contains ten logical signals:

from master to slave:


TX ADR[5..0] VAL RAZ : asynchronous data transmitted by the master : six address lines giving the selected slave address from 00 to 63 : validation pulse, during which the address must be valid (negative pulse) : initialization if this reset is pulsed during VAL pulse, inhibition if the VAL is pulsed during the RAZ (active at low level)

from slave to master:


RX : asynchronous data received by the master

Each slave receives from the back-panel six signals, NUC[5..0 ], that allows it to determine its address and to compare to the ADR[5..0] address.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture


2.2.1 BCF functional architecture
Depending on the BCF physical architecture, the following functions are enabled, see Figure 2 "BCF functional architecture" (page 25):

control and switching data channel concentrator dual trunk interface synchronization alarm regroup

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

25

The following figure shows the BCF functional architecture:


Figure 2 BCF functional architecture

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

26 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

The BCF contains the following units:

2.2.1.1 Control, Switching and Management (CSWM) (page 26) 2.2.1.2 Data Signaling Concentration unit (DSC) (page 30) 2.2.1.3 PCM Interface (PCMI) (page 32) 2.2.1.4 Synchronization (SYNC) (page 34) 2.2.1.5 ALarm COllecting function (ALCO) (page 36) 2.2.1.6 Gateway (GTW) (page 36)

2.2.1.1 Control, Switching and Management (CSWM)

The CSWM unit is duplicated for safety reasons, giving CSWMA and CSWMB. The CSWM unit is the master BCF unit. It enables communication with the BSC, organizes, stores and broadcasts all the data it receives from the BSC, supervises and uses defense action on the equipment it controls. It must do the following, see Figure 3 "Organization of CSWM functions" (page 27):

Setting up communication with the BSC (page 27) BTS Downloading (page 28) Managing the synchronization (page 28) Managing the switching matrix (page 28) Managing the FH bus (page 29) Managing the defense actions against slave units (page 29) Enabling duplex operations (page 30)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture Figure 3 Organization of CSWM functions

27

Setting up communication with the BSC When the CSWM is activated, it must connect to the BSC to work. A link is set up on an external PCM. Since a number of PCM links unite the BTS and BSC, individual PCM links are frequently polled. If connection attempts fail on all the available PCMs, the CSWM resets.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

28 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

BTS Downloading When the call has been set up with the BSC, the CSWM reports its status. The BSC downloads the BTS if the CSW code has not already been downloaded. The set of the BCF downloadable files is formed by two catalog files (BOOT kbit LOAD and DLU), containing the list of the files, a configuration file and a file containing the CSW code. Managing the synchronization At start-up, the CSWM chooses the first correct clock from among six. During LAPD connection, the BTS forces the clock on the PCM carrying the LAPD. Managing the switching matrix The switching matrix management includes the following:

initialization The 0 time slot on each PCM link is looped back on itself by the transmission test interface, which is a hardware device that connects the PCM 0 time slot transmission and reception on the reception interface. The frames received and transmitted in each TS 0 over each PCM link are frequently compared to allow the switching matrix to be tested at start-up time and its performance to be monitored.

configuration The switching matrix is configured when the BSC requests the BCF to set up or release a signaling or traffic channel. Signaling channels are set up (or broken off) between an DRX signaling time slot and a non-concentrated link on a signaling concentrator unit. This may entail (dis)connection between a concentrated link on a signaling concentrator unit and a PCM link time slot on a PCM interface. Traffic channels are set up (or broken off) between a DRX traffic time slot and a PCM link time slot on a PCM interface.

monitoring/defense The switching matrix is monitored by endless loops that are activated during the initialization phase. If a fault occurs, the switching matrix is designated as faulty and switch over is triggered. The cause can be pinpointed from among the following:

switching matrix internal PCM bus idle interface transmission test interface reception test interface
The switching matrix has 16 PCM links. Each PCM link has the following interfaces:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

29

transmission test interface reception test interface idle interface

All 12n PCM time slots are connected to 2n+ 1 PCM time slots to allow PCM links to be routed when the BTS are chained together (drop and insert technique). Managing the FH bus The FH bus is connected to various DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 units. FH bus management becomes involved when the BSC sends cell configuration or radio transmission configuration messages. The CSWM uses the cell configuration message to construct the internal tables needed for FH bus management. The radio transmission configuration message is used to send monitoring masks to transmitters used to check for frequency collisions and the flags on FH input. FH bus management receives the frequency collision and no FH bus flag messages sent by transmitters on the O and M bus. Frequency collision messages cause an event report to be sent to the BSC (messages are correlated to avoid repetition). No FH bus flag message results in the following:

a DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 fault when all the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 detect the same event a DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 fault when one event is detected

Managing the defense actions against slave units The CSWM undertakes defense action when it receives alarm messages or when the scanner no longer detects transmitter activity. If the faulty transmitter was configured (BCCH), the BTS sends an event report with impact to the BSC; otherwise, the event report is without impact. The CSWM undertakes defense action when the DSC sends an event report on the O and M bus or when the scanner no longer detects DSC activity. The following faults can occur:

hardware fault

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

30 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

The DSC is faulty if any of its connections fail. Then the DSC is reset, and external tests are run.

unexpected frames or queue overflow The CSWM sends an event report to the BSC which takes the appropriate action. loss on the O and M bus The CSWM triggers defense action, the DSC is reset, and external tests are run.

Enabling duplex operations Switchover may be triggered by hardware or software resetting. The watchdog triggers hardware resetting, and software is reset by a software init message. Hardware resetting may be triggered by the following:

a major hardware fault (CPU, memory units, etc.) a serious software fault (address error)

Software resetting may be triggered by the following: a minor hardware fault (switching matrix, internal PCM bus, O and M bus drivers) a system software fault (dynamic memory overfilling)

The switchover procedure can only be performed in a stable system status. In the event of switchover, the CSWM tries to return to the last stable condition. It checks that its database (last stable state) and slave processor states (alarm units, synchronization units, concentrator units, PCM interface units and transmitter units) are consistent and may reconfigure them.

2.2.1.2 Data Signaling Concentration unit (DSC)

The DSC is controlled by the CSWM. It communicates with the CSWM through the O and M bus. It serves channel multiplexing, demultiplexing, and Operations and Maintenance (O and M) functions. Multiplexing and demultiplexing The CSWM uses the DSC to set up communication between the BSC and the other entities that make up the BTS. The LAPD protocol ignores the DSC that serves concentrator and routing functions. The DSC reads level 2 addresses (TEI) contained in LAPD frames and, using a routing table, sends the information onto another time slot. The time slot may be concentrated (a number of TEI arrive) or not (single TEI).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

31

Configuration

The CSWM sends the following to the DSC:

overall configuration connect and disconnect configurations

Overall configuration data includes the following: the size of message queues two queue overflow thresholds the period defining the moment observation messages are sent

A connection configuration connects a TEI in a single time slot to a second concentrated time slot. Disconnecting may affect a TEI in a single time slot or in a concentrated time slot. Disconnecting a concentrated time slot automatically triggers disconnection of the concentrated TEI it contained. Observations The DSC returns its status to the CSWM as requested. The status report contains overload alarms and hardware failures. The DSC sends regular observation messages to the CSWM that contain the following for the last traffic period and for each time slot and TEI:

queue size the maximum size reached by the queue number of messages handled since the last status request

Tests The DSC constantly tests unused time slots. It performs external loop tests on CSWM request. The results of unused time slot tests are returned to the CSWM in regular status messages. The CSWM may request the DSC to perform external tests. The DSC checks that links are free and accepts (or refuses) start-up. The DSC returns the results of these tests as requested. Monitoring The DSC supervises its own equipment parts and issues one the following fault messages:

queue overload receipt of unexpected frames PCM link hardware malfunction

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

32 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Fault detection The DSC receives two threshold values from the CSWM that give the overload situation in message transmission queues. When queue thresholds are reached, the DSC issues start and end-of-alarm messages to the CSWM on the O and M bus.

2.2.1.3 PCM Interface (PCMI)

The PCMI interfaces and synchronizes incoming and outgoing PCM links. It converts the external PCM links coming from the BSC into internal PCM links used by the BSC, and vice versa. Each PCMI handles one external PCM link. A PCMI unit does the following:

converts external PCM links into internal PCM for BTS use verifies link quality using error detection codes matches impedance on the type of PCM link used by the operator

Configuration The PCMI can operate without CSWM involvement. However, the CSWM sends a configuration message on the O and M bus that contains the following:

the number of erroneous seconds, which defines a window used to evaluate PCM alarms threshold M1 for frame alignment error counters threshold M2 for the CRC error counter threshold M3 for coding type error counters

Monitoring The PCMI monitors its own equipment and PCM links, and issues fault messages concerning hardware alarms or PCM alarms. PCM alarm managing Managing PCM alarm involves frame, multiframe, submultiframe, zero time slot, and frame alignment; CRC is not managed yet. A frame interval is 125 s. The duration of a multiframe is 2 ms, representing the time of 16 frames. The length of a submultiframe is 1 ms. The TS0 is set aside for the frame alignment signal, multiframe alignment bits, CRC bits, and alarm sending. Frame alignment Frame alignment is operated by the frame alignment byte occupying the TS0 in every other frame. Upon loss of frame alignment the alarm bit is set to 1 and the frame alignment counter is increased.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

33

The PCM alarms Each PCM alarm corresponds to the detection of one anomaly type on the PCM reception. A seriously erroneous second is a second in which an NOS, SIA, RRA, or LOS alarm condition occurred or an FE or CRC counter was overrun. These alarms are indicated by the following LEDs on the front of the DTI board:

LOS: frame lock loss signal (LFA LED) Frame lock is considered lost when three consecutive lock signals are received with errors. This is also the case when bit 2 of TS 0 in frames that contain no locking signal is received three times in a row with errors.

AIS: Alarm indication signal (AIS LED). Not used in the GSM 1900 frequency band. RRA or RAI: Remote Receive Alarm signal or Remote Alarm Indicator (RRA LED). NOS: no frame signal (NOS LED) Upon detecting the beginning of an NOS fault signal, a 64-kbit/s SIA is generated on each TS of the associated internal PCM link, an RRA is sent on the external PCM link, and the application associates an NOS error to the errored second, bringing on the NOS LED.

FE: Frame error (FE LED). Used in case of 2 Mbit/s external PCM link. Error detection is effected only in operation without CRC. The application counts the incorrect frame lock words received, and compares them with the upper and lower thresholds (programmable).

SKP: hop indication reception. Not used. CRC: CRC error signal (CRC LED). Not used in the GSM 1900 frequency band. The quest for CRC multiframe lock ensures that the frame lock word found does indeed correspond to a single lock word to which one can lock permanently.

The alarm LEDs on the front of the board are the LFA, AIS, RRA, NOS, FE, SKP, and CRC. Each alarm event turns on the associated LED for a minimum time of 200 ms. One cause is associated with each seriously erroneous second. The alarm cause is defined in the following descending order of severity: NOS, AIS, LOS, RRA, FE, CRC, and SKP.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

34 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

When the number of seriously erroneous consecutive seconds reaches the number of erroneous seconds (NBSEC) defined in the configuration message, the PCM is designated in fault condition and a message is sent to the CSW. The end-of-fault condition is the number NBSEC of consecutive seconds without errors and the end-of-fault message is sent to the CSW.

2.2.1.4 Synchronization (SYNC)

The synchronization unit must synchronize the DRXs on a single reference time, GSM time. It supervises the different defense stages. There are two identical synchronization units, that have the same software. For more information, see Figure 4 "GSM time bus synchronization" (page 35). Frame alignment Frame alignment is operated by the frame alignment byte occupying TS0 in every other frame. Upon loss of frame alignment, the alarm bit is set to 1 and the frame alignment counter is incremented. The GPRS interface uses asynchronous frame principles in both transmit and receive direction between PCU and BTS. A Joker channel is used when the size of the frame exceeds the size of the main channel. GSM time The network supplies the reference time through three PCMI units. The CSWM selects one of the six clocks and sends it to the synchronization unit. The clock selected must have good long-term accuracy because it is used by the synchronization module to generate reference time for the radio interface with an accuracy of 5 l0-8. If the external reference signal is absent, the CSWM selects a local clock derived from the SYNC module active in "free running" mode. Monitoring The synchronization unit is monitored by its own control and monitoring mechanisms, which check that the unit is operating correctly and GSM time is available on the GSM TIME bus. Alarms are as follows:

SYNO unit outage CSWM clock failure reference clock failure

The last two events are fed back to the CSWM. Defense actions are covered in section dedicated to the CSWM.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

35

In case of a synchronization unit fault, the synchronization units make the switchover decision (active <=> standby). The fault is then fed back to the CSWM over the O and M bus.
Figure 4 GSM time bus synchronization

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

36 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.2.1.5 ALarm COllecting function (ALCO)

The alarm collecting board (ALCO), located outside the BCF, collects internal and external BTS alarms. Internal alarms concern equipment parts on which the BCF does not use any particular detection action, while external alarms are site-dependent. These alarms are sent through the O and M bus to the BCF control unit, which redirects them to the BSC. The board also allows equipment located outside the BTS to be activated.

2.2.1.6 Gateway (GTW)

The gateway (GTW) carries out the following functions, see Figure 5 "BCF/DRX GaTeWay (GTW)" (page 37):

adaptation of the frequency between the radio interface and the Abis interface adaptation of the GSM TIME bus to the GSM TIME channel adaptation of the O and M bus to the O and M channel for the TXs management of the O and M protocol for the gateway as an O and M slave management of part of the defense system management of part of the switchover logic initialization of the gateway board

Adaptation of the GSM TIME bus to the GSM TIME channel This function consists in entering the GSM time on the GSM TIME bus, then making calculations and carrying out formating to send the GSM time to the DRXs by means of the GSM TIME channel. Adaptation of the O and M bus to the O and M channel This function consists in decoding the validation on the O and M bus of a dialog box between the CSWM and the TX, and formating the characters sent and received on the bus and the O and M channel.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture Figure 5 BCF/DRX GaTeWay (GTW)

37

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

38 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Management of the O and M protocol This function provides the level 2 and 3 layers of the O and M protocol concerning CSWM/gateway dialog box. The gateway is fully an O and M slave. It manages a level-3 message dictionary. Management of the defense The software part of the gateway defense system essentially concerns detection of minor and major faults which lead, respectively, to a "light" software reset of certain functions or passage to HALT state. A software watchdog system is also active. Switchover management The softwares role in switchover management is to send command codes to a hardware logic circuit which controls gateway activation and de-activation. Initialization Initialization consists of configuring all peripherals present on the gateway board, the communication controllers, the position of the GSM TIME channel, the cross-connect matrix, and the transfer of certain initialization data from the PROM to the RAM. Multitasking organization Most of the functions are not related to one another and therefore operate completely asynchronously. In order for these functions to take place simultaneously for the external environment, an internal function, transparent to the outside, is needed to manage multitasking, hierarchized organization.

2.2.1.7 BCF configurations

The BCF exists in simplex or duplex configuration. The following table gives the number of boards in every configuration.
Table 2 BCF configurations Boards CSWM PCMI DSC SYNC GTW Simplex BCF 1 1 1 1 1 Duplex BCF 2 (1 active/1 passive) 1 to 3 1 to 4 2 (1 active/1 passive) 2 (1 active/1 passive)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

39

2.2.2 CBCF functional architecture

The CBCF performs the following functions:

switching, synchronization, and concentration control of the alarm management unit PCM Interface

The CMCF board performs the concentration, synchronization, and switching functions. The CMCF also controls the alarm management unit (the RECAL board), which is located outside the CBCF Module. The CMCF board allows operation in duplex mode and in simplex mode. The CPCMI board is the interface between the external PCM links (Abis) and the Private PCMs in the CBCF.

2.2.2.1 CBCF modes

The CBCF can be used in simplex mode with only one CMCF board in slot 0 or 1 running in active mode. Simplex/Duplex mode is managed by a micro switch on the CMCF board. From duplex to simplex, the transaction in never automatic, it always follows a configuration. From simplex to duplex mode, there is no automatic transition when the active board detects the connection with the passive one.

2.2.2.2 Switching, synchronization, and concentration (CMCF)


The CMCF board is duplicated in the CBCF Module to provide redundancy. For more information, see Figure 6 "CMCF board synchronization (full configuration)" (page 40).

One CMCF central processor manages the switching matrix and the synchronization. The main processor and slave processor share the concentration and routing tasks as described below. Switching The two switching matrices in the CMCF receive and distribute the traffic of external PCMs as follows:

Up to six PCMs communicate with the CPCMI boards. Up to six PCMs communicate with the DRXs. Two PCMs communicate with the processing units. One PCM to communicate GSM time. One PCM for tests.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

40 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 6 CMCF board synchronization (full configuration)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

41

Synchronization of the BTS.

The CMCF provides synchronization to the radio part

Synchronization is obtained through a temperature-controlled oscillator that allows the selection of timing signal from seven signals (six from the external PCMs, one from an external source, and one from the CMCF master). The selected clock signal is routed to a digital phase comparator that authorizes synchronization operations in a frequency locked loop (CMCF master) or in a phase locked loop (CMCF slave). The CMCF slave operates in a phase locked loop so that its H4M clock is synchronized with that of the CMCF master. This ensures that phase hopping does not occur during a CMCF switchover. GSM Time The processing unit transmits the GSM Time every 60 ms. The GSM Time is transmitted to the switching matrices of the CMCF master. The CMCF slave reads the GSM Time in the CMCF master, which allows the synchronization of GSM Time on both CMCFs. Figure 6 "CMCF board synchronization (full configuration)" (page 40) shows the synchronization process on the CMCF board. Switchover A switchover occurs in synchronization with the H4M clock. Since the master CMCF and the slave CMCF are synchronized (H4M and GSM Time), the switchover does not cause a timing disruption. The switchover sequence is as follows:

active CMCF becomes inactive inactive CMCF detects the inactivity inactive CMCF becomes active

A CMCF processor becomes inactive in the following circumstances: H16M clock state is NOK and there is dual chain operation the master request is disabled master board is not properly connected to the back panel the active processor is reset while in dual chain operation

Defence and redundancy management A switchover from one CMCF board to the other in the event of an error on the active CMCF board ensures redundancy. The hardware supports duplex and simplex modes.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

42 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

A redundancy channel between both CMCF boards ensures the exchange of data between the boards in the event of a switchover. The defense connectivity is shown in Figure 7 "Defense connectivity between the CMCF boards (full confguration)" (page 42).
Figure 7 Defense connectivity between the CMCF boards (full confguration)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

43

2.2.2.3 Control of the alarm management unit (RECAL)

The CMCF manages the alarm management unit, the RECAL board, located outside the CBCF Module. The RECAL board collects internal and external alarms and routes them to the CMCF, which routes to the BSC. The communication between the CMCF and the RECAL is done using a LAPD protocol link that uses a channel supported by time slot 25 of PCM0.

2.2.2.4 PCM Interface (CPCMI)

Up to three CPCMI boards provide the interface between six external PCM links (Abis) and six Private PCMs used inside the CBCF Module. The interface tasks corresponds to an electrical level translation and a frame format conversion depending on the type of external PCM link (PCM E1, PCM T1, or HDSL). The external PCM interface has functional blocs that perform the following functions:

conversion of analog signals on the Abis interface and the logical signals of the Framer part of the PCMI management of the synchronization clock transposition between the Abis and the Private PCMs signals

Signaling interfaces The CPCMI board uses the PCM and HDSL interfaces described below. PCM Abis interface The E1 interface is compatible with the G703 Recommendation. Its impedance is 120 (two pairs of bidirectional symmetrical links) or 75 Ohms (coaxial cables). The T1 interface is compatible with ANSI T1.403 and T1.102. Its impedance is 100 Ohms (two pairs of bidirectional symmetrical links). HDSL Abis interface The HDSL-E1 format (2B1Q) is on one single twisted copper pair where the transmission rate is 2320 kbit/s for a full E1 frame. This rate is compatible with the ETSI ETR 152 RTR/TM-06002 standard. The HDSL-T1 format (2B1Q) is on one single twisted copper pair where the transmission rate is 1552 kbit/s for a full T1 frame. This rate is not standardized and is considered a proprietary link.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

44 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Private PCMs One CPCMI board is connected to two Private PCM links (PCM0 and PCM1). The O and M communication is done through an HDLC link using TS0 of PCM0. E1/T1 Three bits supplied to the CMCF indicate whether the board is an E1 or T1.

2.2.3 DRX functional architecture

The DRX board has a digital part, a radio part and a power supply board (Figure 8 "DRX board: functional block diagram" (page 45)).

2.2.3.1 DRX digital part

The DRX consists of the following units:

the Advanced MaNagement Unit (AMNU) which manages the DRX the Digital Control Unit for eight channels (DCU8) which processes the signal the SPU which processes the transmission layer the Time Base Unit (BDT) which manages the GSM_TIME for the DRX TX logic unit which is the interface with the transmission part in the DRX Radio board

AMNU unit The AMNU unit manages the DRX. It manages the eight time slots of an TDMA frame, and the radio signaling functions. These functions can be broken down into communication functions (RSL), on the one hand, and operation and maintenance functions (O and M), on the other. For more information, see Figure 9 "AMNU functions" (page 46). The communication functions include:

routing functions concentration functions

Routing functions The TDMA frame management unit routes messages from the BSC. The messages arrive on the RSL and can be broken down into two categories:

messages concerning processing of a single time slot messages concerning all the time slots in the TDMA frame

Concentration functions There are two types of messages:


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

45

transparent messages non-transparent messages

Figure 8 DRX board: functional block diagram

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

46 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 9 AMNU functions

Transparent messages are simply concentrated on a time slot of the internal PCM. Non-transparent messages are:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

47

radio measurement messages of the mobile interference measurement messages on the inactive channels load messages on the RACH channel load messages on the PCH channel

Non-transparent messages are transcoded, averaged and grouped in a single message to the BSC. This message is sent to the same time slot as the transparent messages. The following Operation and Maintenance functions are processed by the Frame management unit (AMNU):

start-up, downloading, initialization configuration monitoring/defense

Start-up/Downloading/Initialization The AMNU is started by a hardware reset or a reinitialization message sent by the BSC. It causes configuration of the LAPD and establishment of the OML link with the BSC. The DRX subsystem can be downloaded only after that the BCF is downloaded and that the units of site management of cell management and of Abis signaling of the DRXs have been configured. Follows a re-flashing of the units for which the software versions are different. Configuration The DRX is configured by the BSC by means of an OML link on the Abis interface. Configuration can be broken down into:

a general configuration:

configuration of the TDMA frame


time slot configurations:

configuration of radio time slots configuration of the frequency hop


Monitoring/defense

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

48 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

The BSC regularly sends status requests to the DRX to detect any problems on the OML link. The LAPD, OML and RSL links are monitored by a timer. If level 2 loss is detected, the BSC and the AMNU try to reconnect. If connection has not been made by the end of the time-out, the AMNU is reinitialized. DCU8 unit The DCU8 unit consists of two signaling processing chains, A and B, as shown in Figure 10 "DCU8 unit diagram" (page 49). Each chain handles four calls in full-rate voice mode and eight calls in half-rate voice mode. Chain A and chain B are connected to a subassembly, the BB_FILT ASIC, which is the interface with the radio part and filters reception samples before sending them to the two chains. A second subassembly, the CHIF, which is associated with the BB_FILT ASIC, calculates encryption and decryption masks. Chain A processes even radio reception time slots and odd radio transmission time slots. Conversely, chain B processes odd radio reception time slots and even radio transmission time slots.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture Figure 10 DCU8 unit diagram

49

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

50 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

The DCU8 unit has five DSPs:

one EGAL DSP, which equalizes the reception signal two DECOD DSPs, which handle reception signal decoding, and level 1 sequencing two TRANS DSPs, which handle transmission signal processing, encoding, and the interface with the remote transcoder

There is one DECOD DSP and one TRANS DSP in each chain. SPU The SPU carries out processing associated with the transmission layer, and to this end, it executes a certain number of functions, such as, see Figure 11 "SPU reception functions" (page 51) and Figure 12 "SPU transmission functions" (page 51):

demodulating the GMSK signal at reception ciphering/deciphering of sent and received data encoding/decoding and interleaving/de-interleaving of data from the various channels encoding/decoding of voice and data (from 13 kbit/s to 16 kbit/s and vice-versa) transferring the discontinuous transmission (DTX) signal filling the BCCH controlling the transmitters (GSMK-8PSK) and receivers processing of radio measurements

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture Figure 11 SPU reception functions

51

Figure 12 SPU transmission functions

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

52 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

BDT The BDT (time base) unit regenerates GSM TIME signals. The GSM time is distributed to the BDT unit of each DRX by means of the GSM TIME channel of the private PCM, every 60 ms. The value of the propagation delay is sent to the DRX by means of the OML link of the private PCM. From these two data, each DRX makes the necessary corrections and regenerates the GSM TIME bus. If, for any reason, the GSM time is not distributed on the BDT unit, the BDT unit locally maintains the GSM TIME bus signals and continues to provide the GSM time to the DRX units. The BDT unit is made up of a digital block and a calculation block. Digital Block The BDT unit receives a 26 MHz clock signal derived from the radio unit clock. This clock signal has the same stability properties as the 4Fbit clock signal provided by the BCF synchronization board and is more stable in the short term. The digital block generates the following signals:

H4M (4.096 MHz) STRTM (recurrent pulse at 577 microseconds) TIME_DATA (containing T1, T2, T3 and TN)

Calculation Block The calculation block synchronizes the H4M and STRTM signals with the synchronization unit signals of the BCF. In addition, it updates the values T1, T2, T3 and TN. The synchronization principle consists of forcing a divider-by-24 counter to divide by 23 (if the BDT is slow) or by 25 (if it is fast). This way, every 23 or 25 periods of 26 MHz (depending on whether the slow BDT is accelerated or the fast BDT is slowed down), the BDT corrects a period of 26 MHz. TX logic unit The main role of the TX logic unit is to control the radio subassembly in real time. It receives the BCF configuration commands from the AMNU. It carries out the processing and sends back reports. Once configured, the TX logic unit reads, on each time slot, the data present on the FH bus. Then it calculates the frequency code and the power code to be used with the radio interface.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

53

Transmission power In general, radio power is determined by two inputs. One controls the maximum static power and the other gives the dynamic attenuation at each time slot. The static power is given by the BCF or CBCF in the CONFIG message. The TX calculates attenuation to compensate for cable loss between the TX-driver and the power amplifier. The dynamic power is provided by the ASIC of the TX logical unit. Its software reads the value and commands the TX-driver accordingly. n the case of a BCCH filler, the additional attenuation introduced is always zero. The power values that the TX and the mobile have to use are fixed by the BTS according to a control algorithm using the measurements results that it makes and the thresholds stockpiled in the OMC. The mobile and the BTS power control can be inhibited by the OMC. The power control aim is to minimize the interferences, ensure good transmission quality and save mobiles batteries. Power slaving The setpoint value is slaved to compensate for gain variations of the transmission chain. Two slaving loops are used to compensate for attenuation in the gain chain. For more information, see Figure 13 "Power slaving diagram" (page 54).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

54 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 13 Power slaving diagram

These loops may be in the following states:

Open: This state is used for calibration of the internal loop with the external loop. Initialization: This state is used for loop start-up. Error: A loop is in error when it is not longer in correspondence with the setpoint. Closed: A loop is closed when it is in slow slaved mode.

2.2.3.2 DRX radio part

The DRX radio part is composed of a power supply board and of the DRX radio board. The power supply is converting common -48 V to specific +5 V/ + 12 V power supply signals for the DRX radio board. The DRX radio board is composed of three units:

the Frequency reference (Fref) unit the receiver unit (RX) the transmitter unit (TX)

Frequency reference unit The reference frequency for all local oscillators is derived from the Fref frequency supplied by the VCXO, itself
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

55

derived from the 4.096 MHz signal provided by the DRX digital part (BCF or CBCF). It provides a very steady and spurious-free reference clock for the RX/TX hopping and fixed synthetizers (13 MHz signal). Receiver unit (RX) The receiver unit (RX) has four main functions. Slot-to-slot frequency hopping is achieved with a dual synthetizer arrangement (one is active while the other one is setting to the following frequency):

signal down conversion from radio frequency band to Intermediate Frequency (IF) then to base band frequency channel filtering (in IF) RX-level dynamic management digitization of the base band signal

The base band signal is then sent in binary form with its scale factor to the DRX digital part. The receiver unit is working as well on signal GMSK that signal 8-PSK. Receiver configuration The receiver configuration is done by the DRX digital part, which sends:

the reception frequency to be used for the following time slot the synchronization clock signal the GSM time synchronization signal

Receiver monitoring The receiver monitors internal equipment: microprocessor and Phase Lock Loops (PLL). If there is a failure or other problem, it generates an alarm:

microprocessor fault frequency range not respected (if the frequency to synthesize as requested by the DRX digital part is incorrect) PLL loss of alignment (if one of the receiver PLLs is not aligned)

Transmitter unit (TX) The Transmitter unit has two main parts: IF and RF chains gain control loop (or Automatic Level Control)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

56 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

IF and RF chain An I/Q modulator with a Local Oscillator (LO) phase-locked on a reference frequency transposes the two baseband I/Q signals into the IF chain. This 125 MHz local oscillator (LO_IF) phase-locked on a 13 MHz signal translates the baseband signals into an intermediate frequency. (The IF is 125 MHz in GSM 900, 286 MHz in GSM 1800 and 299 MHz in GSM 1900). The second LO is used for up conversion from IF to RF. The up-conversion is followed by bandwidth filter, amplifier stages, variable voltage attenuators, and digital attenuators. The Transmitter unit is working as well on GMSK signal that 8-PSK signal. Gain Control Loop (or Automatic Level Control) The driver transmit chain upholds the accuracy of the transmission power compatible with the GSM recommendations against time. The control dynamics use two components: one voltage variation attenuator (VVA) and a step-by-step digital attenuator taking target attenuation into account and compensating for it. The Automatic Level Control also includes the PA.

2.2.3.3 DRX shutting down

DRX soft blocking The DRX soft blocking consists in setting a DRX "out of service" without stopping the calls established on this DRX. If possible, an intra-cell handover is performed for those calls to release the DRX more quickly. Otherwise, the DRX will be released after the normal completion of the calls. DRX soft blocking coupled with a forced handover To speed up the DRX shutting down, the DRX soft blocking can be coupled with a forced handover. The calls will be handed over a neighbour cell if the signal strength is over the handover threshold for that cell.

2.2.3.4 Hint

The two actions mentionned above can be performed into a unique command to a better efficiency of the DRX shutting down.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

57

2.2.3.5 Power supply board

The power supply card provides a dc voltage between 40.5 V and 57 V, to be converted into +5 V, +12 V and -12 V. The 48 V voltage is sent first to the logical DRX unit converter, then, after filtering, to the logical DRX unit and the radio DRX unit converter. The power supply of the board varies according to the DRX types and on the frequencies. The mechanical and electrical grounds are linked to the common reference zero volts.

2.2.4 eDRX/eDRX2 functional architecture

This chapter describes the functional architecture of the eDRX/eDRX2, but does not detail each part. The aim is to give enough information to approach easily the main features.

2.2.4.1 Logic unit (eLDRX)

The logic unit (eLDRX) contains, see Figure 14 "Logic unit (eLDRX): Functional architecture" (page 59):

a FPGA unit which provides:

a control and switching matrix management function a time base function a synchronization function

a management unit (AMNU) which processes the following functions:

start-up, downloading, initialization configuration monitoring LAPD break event reports

a transmission unit which provides:

a radio signaling function a signal processing function a power regulation function a RX logic function a TX logic function

Setting up by setup of DRX for AMNU, transmission functions.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

58 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

When the BTS is activated, it must be connected to the BSC to work. A link is set up on an external PCM link.

Downloading When communications have been set up with the BSC, the BTS reports its status. The BSC downloads, if necessary, the software to the BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture Figure 14 Logic unit (eLDRX): Functional architecture

59

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

60 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Synchronization management At the start-up, the BTS selects the clock. During LAPD connection, the BTS forces the clock onto the PCM carrying the LAPD. Switching matrix management Each PCM link managed by the switching matrix has a transmission test interface, reception test interface, and an idle interface The switching matrix is configured when the BSC requests to set up or to release a signaling or traffic channel from the BTS. Signaling channels are set up (or broken) between a transmission signaling TS and a non-concentrated link. This operation may entail (dis)connection between a a concentrated link TS coming from the BTS and a PCM link TS on the PCM interface. Traffic channels are set up (or broken) between a transmission traffic TS and a PCM link TS on the PCM interface.

Data signaling concentration function The BTS uses this function to set up the communication between the BSC and the other entities that make up the BTS. This function is implemented with the LAPD protocol that serves concentrator and routing functions.

Time base The time base regenerates the GSM_TIME bus with information issued from the GSM_TIME channel. If, for any reason, the GSM time is not distributed to the time base, this one maintains the GSM_TIME bus signals locally and continues to provide the GSM time to the logic unit. Synchronization function The synchronization function must synchronize the transmissions on a single reference time: GSM _TIME. The network provides a radio reference clock through two PCM links. This clock selected has good long-term accuracy. its the reason that the synchronization module to generate an exact reference time for the radio interface uses this clock. If the external reference signal is missing, the BTS selects the local clock. The synchronization function is monitored by internal control and monitoring mechanisms. They check that the synchronization is operating correctly and that the GSM time is available on the GSM_TIME bus.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

61

FPGA impacts for synchronization following:

The impacts on the FPGA are the

The CMCF FPGA must be able to get its synchronization from another source that Abis link. Management of this synchronizing signal (absence, loss, retrieve). Management of new activity flags on external SY and GSM time. Management of the synchronization LEDs ("CLK 0", "CLK 1" and "CLK 2" on S8000 and S12000; 4 "SYN" on BTS 18000). Impacts of switch over on the master BTS are still to be studied.

Comment: Only the FPGA of the CMCF phase 2 will support these evolutions linked to the synchronized BTS feature; thats why the CMCF phase 1 does not support this feature. These impacts are applicable to ICM FPGA too. AMNU The AMNU (Advanced MaNagement Unit) monitors site and transmissions and manages the eight time slots of a TDMA frame. The following functions are processed by the frame management unit (AMNU):

start-up, downloading, and initialization configuration monitoring LAPD break event reports

Start-up, downloading, initialization The AMNU is started by a hardware reset or a re-initialization message sent by the BTS. It configures the LAPD and establishes an OML link with the BSC. Depending on the BSC request, the BTS systematically initiates a downloading phase of the catalog files and the following software units:
boot software and operating system: TRX monitoring and maintenance software: site monitoring and maintenance software: test software: BOOT OML AMNU BCF TOOLS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

62 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture TDMA1 kbit TDMA2 radio signaling link management software:

RSL1 kbit RSL2 DLU

hardware configuration DLU:

A reflashing of the units for which the software versions are different follows the downloading. Configuration BTS. The transmission is configured by the BSC through the

The configuration provides:

a general configuration. It contains the configuration of the TDMA frame and provides the logic unit parameters shared by the whole cell, such as:

cell to identity (BSIC) BCCH frequency indication of frequency hop implementation the frequency of the TDMA frame if there is no frequency hopping

a configuration of the radio TS. It specifies the logic channel type to use for TS. a configuration of the frequency hop. It specifies, for TS, the list of frequencies to use, as well as sequencing. This configuration is optional and only appears if the frequency hop was requested in the TDMA frame configuration.

Supervision The BTS regularly sends status requests to detect any problems. LAPD break A timer monitors the LAPD with the OML and RSL links. If level two loss is detected, the BSC and the AMNU try to reconnect. If connection is not re-established before the end of the time-out, the AMNU is reinitialized. Event reports The AMNU:

collects all events detected (internal or external alarms) provides the filtration and reports errors (transmission/ reception) to the BSC provides the filtration to prevent repetition of non-transient events, which means it can send to the BSC a single indication

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

63

The AMNU sends errors to the BSC by sending "event report" messages through the BTS. There are two types of these messages:

transient messages which are not acknowledged by the BSC non-transient messages which must be acknowledged by the BSC and which are repeated by AMNU until they are acknowledged

Radio Signaling function The main characteristics of this function are described below:

the radio access management (level 1) It manages a dialog between the AMNU signaling functions and the signal processing function (SPU) which are connected to the AMNU. the radio management (level 2) It manages the LAPDm level 2 signaling on the radio channels. the radio resources management (level 3) It provides mainly the level 2 management on the common channels and control of level 2 functions on dedicated and common channels. the radio measurements management (level 3) It provides the return of interference measurements carried out by the one signal-processing unit on the inactive dedicated channels and transmission of these measurements to the AMNU.

the Operation kbit Maintenance functions (O and M) They provide configuration and unconfiguration of the TS and frequency hopping functions.

Signal Processing function The signal processing (SPU) function performs processing associated with the transmission layer executes a number of functions, such as:

modulation/demodulation (GMSK or 8-PSK) ciphering/deciphering of sent and received data coding/decoding and interleaving/de-interleaving of data from the various channels processing radio measurements mobile transmission timing advance function discontinuous transmission (DTX) BCCH filling transmitter and receiver control
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

64 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Power regulation function Its main function is to check instantly the associated radio subset. It receives configuration instruction through the AMNU unit. In this case, it launches processing and returns reports. Once that the function is configured, each TS in attendance on the FH bus is reading. Next the function calculates the frequency and the power code to be applied to the radio interface. Each function act a control of the set point (emission power), to improve the non-linearity of the gain of the transmission chain. It launches these main operations:

frequency hopping management power slaving transmission power alarms management The logic functions:

RX logic function

maintain:

the interface between the SPU functions with respectively the RX


radio functions on the radio unit (eRDRX)

and the ciphering Uplink/Downlink

filter the digital samples, provided by the RX radio functions, to base band signals generate the FH bus

Each RX radio functions processes the eight TS of the radio frame. The main characteristics of the RX radio function are:

an interface for the reception of the GSM time to maintain the DSP synchronization on the radio frame for the transmission:

the recording transmission parameters and the cyphering key the parameters cyphering and the transmission on the FH bus

for the reception:

the recording of the reception parameters and the ciphering key the base band filtering of the digital samples provided by the
converter

the ciphering key moving


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture

65

TX logic function They maintain the interface between the SPU functions and respectively the TX radio functions of the radio unit (eRDRX). This TX logic function processes the eight TSs of the radio frame. It ensures the digital/analog conversion of samples, and receives:

information about the burst bits, from the RX function and through the FH bus, modulated signal samples, according to the modulation format previously set, digital data (alarms, output power, and others), from various equipments of the analog part of the transmitter,

and ensures corrective actions.

2.2.4.2 Radio unit (eRDRX)

The radio unit processes the radio channels for transmission/reception function. For more information, see Figure 15 "Radio unit (eRDRX): Functional unit" (page 67). The eDRX board include the following functions: power supply unit, receiver unit and transmitter unit, and frequency reference unit. Power supply unit The power supply unit is converting common -48 V to specific +5 V/+12 V power supply signals for the DRX radio board. Frequency reference unit The reference frequency is synthesized by 13 Mhz Phase-Locked-Loop, referenced with the 4.096 MHz (H4M) provided by the digital board. Transmitter unit The transmitter unit contains the transmission channels of lower power which manage the Radio Frequency (RF) signals (GSMK or 8-PSK) and Intermediate Frequency (IF) signals as follows:

I/Q modulation IF filtering and amplification IF and RF transposition RF band filtering amplification and variable attenuation output power control

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

66 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Receiver unit The receiver unit includes the reception radio channels which manage the RF signals (GSMK or 8-PSK) and the IF signals as follows:

RF signals from LNA-splitter RF to IF transposition IF channel filtering and amplification RF to BF transposition Analog-to-digital conversion

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS functional architecture Figure 15 Radio unit (eRDRX): Functional unit

67

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

68 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture


2.3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS architecture presentation
The base cabinet and the extension cabinet are divided into three parts (Figure 16 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Base cabinet layout (with BCF)" (page 69) to Figure 18 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Extension cabinet layout" (page 71)):

top compartment left side right side

The layout of the equipment in the base and extension cabinets is identical in the top compartment and on the left side. The cabinet layout on the right side of the base and extension cabinets is different. In the base cabinet, the BCF or CBCF is located in the BCF or CBCF Compartment. In the same compartment of the extension cabinet, a filling plate replaces the BCF or CBCF.

2.3.1.1 Top compartment

The top compartment opens by means of a cover on the top of the cabinet. The front of the cabinet is perforated to allow air to circulate. The top compartment has two or three elements: the optional battery box and the climatic system (the DACS or two ACUs).

2.3.1.2 Compartment on the left side

User compartment This compartment is available for Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM). For more information, see the documentation provided by the equipment manufacturer. For GSM 1800 frequency bands, Nortel has developed RW Series M products whose reference to the document is the following: 840-900201-002. The user interconnection compartment is optional. It is required only when a user kit or a -48 V connection box is used. PA interconnection compartment The PA interconnection compartment centralizes the -48 V dc power supply of the Power Amplifiers (PA, ePA or HePA). Amplifier and alarm compartment The amplifier and alarm compartment receives up to eight Power Amplifiers (PA) and the Alarm Collecting unit (ALCO or RECAL). The ALCO or RECAL board is connected to one or two external alarm protection boards (ALPRO), located outside the cabinet.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 16 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Base cabinet layout (with BCF)

69

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

70 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 17 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Base cabinet layout (with CBCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 18 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Extension cabinet layout

71

F-type converter A converter, called F-type converter, supplies + 15 V dc to the LNA-splitter and the VSWR-meter. A second F-type converter is available as an option.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

72 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

RF Combiner and Tx-Filter compartment The RF Combiner and Tx-Filter compartment can hold a maximum of either of the following combination of modules:

six RF Combiner modules, duplexer-only (D) six RF Combiner modules, two-way hybrid duplexer (H2D) three RF Combiner modules, four-way hybrid duplexer (H4D) four RF Combiner modules, duplexer-only (D) and four Tx-Filter modules (TxF)

The D, H2D, and H4D RF Combiner modules perform the following functions:

transmission coupling of two, three, or four channels filtering and duplexing of transmission and reception signals on the same antenna port amplification of reception signals monitoring of the antenna VSWR (option)

The Tx-Filter performs the following functions: filtering of transmission signals monitoring of the antenna VSWR (option)

Combiner interconnection compartment (COMICO) The COMICO is the interconnection board for the modules of the RF Combiner compartment that centralizes inputs/outputs on the alarms and the power supplies.

2.3.1.3 Compartment on the right side

BCF or CBCF compartment The BCF or CBCF Compartment of the base cabinet contains a fuse panel and a BCF unit or CBCF Module. The following BCF boards are visible and accessible in the front panel of the BCF Compartment:

three PCM Interface boards (PCMI) two Gateway boards (GTW) two Control, Switching and Management boards (CSWM) four Data Signaling Concentration boards (DSC) two synchronization boards (SYNC)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

73

three 48 V/5 V/12 A converters (one converter is optional) one Power Supply Command board (PSCMD)

Two CBCF boards are visible on the front panel of the CBCF module: Compact Main Common Function (CMCF) Compact PCMI (CPMI)

The fuse panel in the base cabinet contains three fuses: a 4A-fuse to protect the BCF unit or CBCF Module a 1A-fuse to protect the alarm collecting board (ALCO or RECAL) a 10A-fuse to protect the user compartment One SiteFlash cables kit (NTQA79CA) is mandatory when implementing a satellite ABIS connection. It is used to update the nominal software of the CBCF, DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 modules, allowing the BTS to synchronize on the network. The kit includes:

one cable for a CBCF connection (through the CMCF board)


(NTQA3370) (NTQA3372)

one cable dedicated to an eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX connection


Since there is no BCF or CBCF in the extension cabinet, a filling plate occupies the place of these units. The fuse panel in the extension cabinet contains only two fuses: a 1A fuse for the alarm collecting board and a 10A-fuse for the user compartment. Note that the eDRX2 is only applicable when RECAL board is used. DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 interconnection compartment The interconnection compartment centralizes DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 outputs. It connects the modules to the Power Amplifiers (PA) on the one hand, and interconnects them by means of the FH bus, on the other. However, the eDRX2 is available only for the S8000 BTS with CBCF, and the S8003 BTS (not for the S8006 BTS since it is GSM 1800 whereas the eDRX2 is GSM 900 and not for BTS S8002). DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 compartment The compartment receives up to eight modules. RX-splitter compartment The RX-splitter compartment receives up to six RX-splitters, which receive RF signals from the LNA splitter and distribute them to the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 RX inputs.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

74 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Power system compartment The power system compartment may be configured according to three types:

The first type is a Power Controller Unit (PCU) and up to six 600W or 680W rectifiers (one of them redundant) which convert Mains Voltage to -48 V dc to be used in the cabinet. According to the number of DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 for each cell, the number of rectifiers may be decreased. The other type is an integrated power system including a Controller Module, a Distribution Module and up to seven 500 W rectifiers (one of them redundant). The last type is a GIPS including a Controller Module (DCU), a Distribution Module (ADU) and up to five 680 W rectifiers (one of them redundant).

AC box This box is located on the right-hand side of the right-hand part of the cabinet. Two types of ac box are available according to the power system type:

The ac mains box that receives the mains voltage and distributes it to the power system compartment and to the cooling system. The PCU only controls the dc supply. ac supply connects to the back panel that is common for all rectifiers. The ac box/GIPS (used with the GIPS only) that includes AC input terminal blocks distributing power to the GIPS and to the optional ac user plug.

In the extension cabinet, a filling plate replaces the BCF. On left of this filling plate there are two fuses.

2.3.2 S8000 Indoor BTS architecture presentation 2.3.2.1 Base cabinet

The compartment layout of the base cabinet is presented in Figure 19 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Base cabinet layout" (page 76). Cabinet top The cabinet top can hold a maximum of two ALPRO modules. An ALPRO module consists of an ALPRO board, a protection cover, and an interconnection plate. The fan grid in the upper panelis an air outlet. Radio outputs, the cabling with the separate BCF Cabinet (if applicable) and the cabinet power supply are achieved from the top of the cabinet. Combiner interconnection (COMICO) compartment This compartment consists of an interconnection board for the combiner compartment

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

75

modules, which centralizes inputs/outputs on the alarms and the power supplies. RF combiner and Tx-filter compartment The RF Combiner and Tx-filter compartment can hold a maximum of either of the following combination of modules:

six RF Combiner modules of the duplexer only type (D) six RF Combiner modules of the two-way hybrid duplexer type (H2D) three RF Combiner modules of the the four-way hybrid duplexer type (H4D) four RF Combiner modules of the duplexer only type (D) and four Tx-Filter modules (TxF) one RF Combiner Module of eight-way cavity combiner and two duplexers

The RF Combiner modules perform the following functions:

transmission coupling of the channels filtering and duplexing of transmission and reception signals on the same antenna port amplification of reception signals monitoring of the antenna VSWR (option)

The Tx-Filter performs the following functions: filtering of transmission signals monitoring of the antenna VSWR (option)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

76 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 19 S8000 Indoor BTS: Base cabinet layout

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

77

dc compartment This compartment contains four switches to disconnect the power supply to the Power Amplifiers, the fans, the ALCO or RECAL board and the BCF or the CBCF. The compartment also contains an F-type converter, which supplies + 15 V dc to the LNA-splitter and the VSWR-meter. A second F-type converter is available as an option. PA interconnection compartment This compartment centralizes the -48 V dc power supply of the Power Amplifiers (PA, ePA or HePA). Power amplifier and alarm compartment This compartment contains:

one to eight power amplifiers (PAs, ePAs, or HePA) one ALCO or RECAL board

It is possible to connect the ALCO or RECAL board to one or two external alarm protection boards (ALPRO) located on top of the base cabinet. DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 interconnection compartmen t This compartment centralizes DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 outputs. It connects them to the Power Amplifiers (PA, ePA, or HePA) on the one hand, and interconnects them by means of the FH bus, on the other. DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 and CBCF compartment compartment contains a maximum of eight modules. This

The CBCF module is located in the far right of this compartment. A filling plate replaces the CBCF when the BCF is used. RX-splitter compartment This compartment contains up to six RX-splitters, which receive data signals from the units in the coupler compartment and distributes them to the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3. Climatic compartment This compartment contains three fans, and the FANICO board (FANICO PCB [Printed Circuit Board]). One fan is optional and is used to ensure redundancy. This board enables the control of the rotation of each fan and sends an alarm (one for each fan) to the ALCO or RECAL board when the fan speed goes below a fixed threshold.

2.3.2.2 BCF cabinet

The layout of the BCF cabinet is presented in Figure 20 "S8000 Indoor BTS: BCF cabinet layout" (page 79) and Figure 21 "S8000 Indoor BTS: BCF cabinet top view" (page 80).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

78 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Upper compartment This compartment contains three fans and a FANICO board (identical to the one in the radio cabinet). Rotation management alarms are sent to the ALCO board. There are three 800-mA fuses on the front panel of the BCF to protect the fans. Lower compartment boards: This compartment contains the following BCF

three PCMI boards two gateway boards (GTW) two control and switching units (CSWM) four data signaling concentration units (DSC) two synchronization modules (SYNC) three 48 V/ 5 V/12 A converters (one converter is optional) one Power Supply CoMmanD unit (PSCMD).

There is a 4A-fuse on the front panel to the left of the BCF board to protect itself.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 20 S8000 Indoor BTS: BCF cabinet layout

79

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

80 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 21 S8000 Indoor BTS: BCF cabinet top view

Back panel The BCF back panel connects the switching part of the BTS. It provides connections for the BCF boards, see Figure 22 "BCF back panel " (page 82). It receives the external PCMs from the BSC (Abis interface) and the six private PCMs from the BTS. It also distributes the O and M bus, its own alarms and the 48 V power supply of the ALCO board.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

81

The BCF back panel has the following connectors:

A 37-pin female connector receives the six PCMs of the Abis interface. Three 25-pin female connectors distribute the O and M bus. Three 25-pin female connectors each distribute two private PCMs. A 3-pin connector is used for power supply. A 4-pin connector distributes converter alarms to the ALCO unit. Thirty 96-pin male connectors connect the P1 and P2 connectors of the following units: PCMI, DSC, PSU, CSWM, GTW, and SYNC. Thirteen 8-pin male connectors supply the units connected to the back-panel.

The BCF back panel also connects PCM termination resistors in order to reduce radio electric transmission and prevent end-of-line multiple reflection problems. The P2 connectors are equipped with a localizing device that prevents the insertion of a board into the wrong slot. This is done by means of cells on the back-panel that are blocked and tabs that are cut out on the board connectors. For more information, see Figure 23 "Localizing device" (page 83). The BCF back panel has only one ground. No distinction is made between logical ground and physical ground. For units that use this distinction, the mechanical ground is connected to the logical ground. However, the reference 0 V of the -48 V power supply (M0 V) is not connected to the back-panel ground. The -48 V dc power is protected by fuses.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

82 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 22 BCF back panel

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 23 Localizing device

83

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

84 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.3.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS architecture presentation

The S8002 BTS is housed in one cabinet (Figure 24 "S8002 BTS layout" (page 85)). The layout of the equipment in the base cabinet has two compartments:

one top compartment one main compartment

2.3.3.1 Top compartment

The top compartment opens by means of a cover on the top of the cabinet. The front part of the cabinet is perforated to allow air to circulate. The top compartment houses the CDACS climatic system.

2.3.3.2 Main compartment


Rectifiers

The rectifiers are the same as for the S8000 BTS.

There are three 600 W rectifier blocks in parallel. Each block is able to deliver 600 W at -48 V dc output. The available dc power is 1200 W (two blocks) with one block for redundancy (600 W). Rectifier blocks have a large input voltage range (198 to 254 V) with integrated power factor correctors. The output floating voltage is automatically adjusted according to the level of a control signal proportional to the battery temperature. Each block has its own ac, dc overheating alarm signal. User ICO and user compartment See the previous section of the S8000 Outdoor BTS. Rx-splitter The two Rx-splitter modules are identical with the module used in the S8000 Outdoor BTS. See the previous section of the S8000 Outdoor BTS. Power amplifier Up to two power amplifiers (PA) amplify the RF signal delivered to the antenna through the RF combiner. Each PA is a physically independent unit, characterized by its frequency band and outputpower. Driver Receiver (DRX) The Driver Receiver units (DRXs) are in charge of amplifying the received RF signals (two, in case of diversity), processing the TDMA frames and driving the Power Amplifier. See the previous section of the S8000 Outdoor BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 24 S8002 BTS layout

85

Combiner The RF combiner contains two modules only. See the previous section of the S8000 Outdoor BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

86 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

CBCF The Compact Base Common Function (CBCF) is identical with the one of the S8000 BTS. See the previous section of the S8000 Outdoor BTS. C-PA ICO This interconnection module provides the dc distribution for the PAs and the converters. Main ICO between: The Main ICO board performs the digital interconnect

the two DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 the two PAs the CBCF the RECAL the F-type converters

and provides the power supply for the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 (-48 V) and the F-type converters (+/- 15 V).

2.3.3.3 Lower compartment

Batteries Four batteries in series provide backup for a minimum of 2 hours. RECAL The RECAL is identical with the S8000 BTS.

C-ACMAIN The C-ACMAIN ensures the ac distribution from the external ac to the rectifiers, the CDACS and the maintenance plug. It also provides EMC filtering and lightning protections.

2.3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS architecture presentation

The layout of the equipment in the base cabinet has two compartments:

one main compartment one lower compartment (internal cooling system)

2.3.4.1 Main compartment

Cabinet top The cabinet top holds one ALPRO module. The ALPRO module consists of an ALPRO board, a protection cover, and an interconnection plate. The fan grid in the upper panel is an air outlet. Radio outputs and the cabinet power supply are achieved from the top of the cabinet. A 75 ohm box can optionally be added to the cabinet top.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

87

Combiner interconnection (COMICO) compartment This compartment consists of an interconnection board for the combiner compartment modules, which centralizes inputs/outputs on the alarms and the power supplies. RF Combiner and Tx-Filter compartment The RF Combiner and Tx-Filter compartment can hold a combination of the following modules:

RF Combiner modules of the duplexer only type (D) RF Combiner modules of the two-way hybrid duplexer type (H2D) RF Combiner modules of the duplexer only type (D) and Tx-Filter modules (TxF)

The RF Combiner modules perform the following functions:

transmission coupling of the channels filtering and duplexing of transmission and reception signals on the same antenna port amplification of reception signals monitoring of the antenna VSWR (option)

The Tx-Filter performs the following functions: filtering of transmission signals monitoring of the antenna VSWR (option)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

88 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 25 S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet layout

DRX interconnection compartment This compartment centralizes DRX outputs. It connects them to the Power Amplifiers (PA) on the one hand, and interconnects them by means of the FH bus, on the other.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

89

F-type converter A converter, called F-type converter, supplies + 15 V dc to the LNA-splitter and the VSWR-meter. A second F-type converter is available as an option. DRX compartment This compartment contains three modules. Power amplifier and alarm compartment This compartment contains:

three power amplifiers (PAs) one alarm management unit (RECAL)

It is possible to connect the RECAL board to the external alarm protection board (ALPRO) located on top of the base cabinet. CBCF compartment The CBCF module is located in the compartment.

The following CBCF boards are visible and accessible in the front panel of the compartment:

one Compact PCM Interface boards (CPCMI) (plus two optional CPCMI) one Compact Main Common Functions board (CMCF) (plus one optional CMCF) one interconnection BCFICO board one CBCF interconnection Back panel module (CBP) This compartment contains:

dc main compartment

one main breaker 60A nine fuses

RX-splitter compartment This compartment contains up to six RX-splitters, which receive data signals from the units in the coupler compartment and distributes them to the DRXs.

2.3.4.2 Lower compartment

The lower compartment contains the internal cooling system which is composed of four fans.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

90 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.3.5 S8006 Outdoor BTS architecture presentation

The base cabinet is divided in three parts, see Figure 26 "S8006 BTS layout" (page 91):

the top cabinet the compartment on the left side the compartment on the right side

2.3.5.1 Top compartment

The top compartment houses the climatic system (LNS-DACS).

2.3.5.2 Compartment on the left side

PA interconnection compartment The PA interconnection compartment centralizes the -48 V dc power supply of the Power Amplifiers (PA, ePA or HePA). Amplifier and alarm compartment The amplifier and alarm compartment receives up to six Power Amplifiers (PA) and the alarm management unit (RECAL). The RECAL board is used with the CBCF module. F-type converter A converter, called F-type converter, supplies + 15 V dc to the LNA-splitter and the VSWR-meter. RF Combiner compartment The RF Combiner compartment can hold a maximum of six RF Combiner modules of two-way hybrid duplexer type (H2D). The H2D RF Combiner modules perform the following functions:

transmission coupling of the channels filtering and duplexing of transmission and reception signals on the same antenna port amplification of reception signals monitoring of the antenna VSWR (option)

Combiner interconnection compartment (COMICO) The COMICO is the interconnection board for the modules of the RF Combiner compartment that centralizes inputs/outputs on the alarms and the power supplies.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 26 S8006 BTS layout

91

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

92 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.3.5.3 Compartment on the right side

DRX interconnection compartment This compartment centralizes DRX outputs. It connects them to the Power Amplifiers (PA) on the one hand, and interconnects them by means of the FH bus, on the other. DRX and CBCF compartment of six modules. This compartment contains a maximum

The CBCF module is located in the far left of this compartment. RX-splitter compartment This compartment contains up to six RX-splitters, which receive data signals from the units in the coupler compartment and distributes them to the DRXs. dc interconnection compartment This compartment centralizes:

the 48 V output the 48 V output fuse the CBCF fuse the RECAL fuse the alarm connector

Power system compartment The power compartment houses a power controller unit (PCU) and five rectifiers maximum.

2.3.6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS additional equipment presentation 2.3.6.1 Battery cabinet


A cabinet, independent from the BTS cabinet, can be added to increase the power autonomy of the BTS in case of a mains power failure. This cabinet may house one of three possible types of battery. The batteries are arranged in four strings, each containing four batteries, see Figure 27 "External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)" (page 93) to Figure 29 "External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries)" (page 95). To use the batteries of this cabinet, internal batteries have to be disconnected at first. The autonomy on these batteries, which depends on the configuration and the equipment of the BTS, can have a length of around half an hour to some 14 hours.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

93

Below the four battery strings is the Heating Ventilation Unit (HVU), consisting of the following:

a fan a heating resistor a controller

Figure 27 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

94 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 28 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 29 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries)

95

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

96 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.3.6.2 (R)IPM-USER in a 19-inch shelf (S8000 Indoor BTS option)

The S8000 Indoor BTS, supporting the Abis over IP feature, is populated with one IPM-USER or RIPM-USER located in a standard 19-inch shelf next to the BTS. The RIPM-USER is the redundant variant of the IPM-USER. Only cold redundancy (through redundancy of sub-components) is supported inside the RIPM-USER. No redundancy of the RIPM-USER is supported to ensure hot duplex mechanism. For more information, see 5.31 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER (page 340).

2.3.6.3 75-Ohm kit (GSM 900/1800)

This kit is required for GSM 900 and GSM 1800 configurations working with 75 O line impedance. It ensures the adaptation of the 120-Ohm impedance from the PCMI boards to the 75 O impedance of the external PCMs. For the S8000 and S8003 Indoor BTS, this kit is put on the cabinet top, see Figure 32 "S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor: 75 ohms box type 1" (page 100) and Figure 33 "S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor: 75 ohms box type 2" (page 101). For the S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor BTS, this kit is housed in a waterproof box, which can be put either in the BTS plinth or on-site outside the BTS, see Figure 30 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top" (page 98) and Figure 31 "Top view of the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 99). The kit can be fitted as suitable to the customer.

2.3.6.4 PCM connection box (S8000/S8002 Outdoor BTS option for GSM 900/1800)
This box is available as an option to protect two PCM links. An upgraded kit allows the protection of up to six PCM links. The PCM connection box is waterproof and can be put either in the BTS plinth or on-site outside the BTS. For more information, see Figure 34 "S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor BTS: PCM connection box" (page 102). The box can be fitted as suitable to the customer.

2.3.6.5 -48 V dc connection box (S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor BTS option for GSM 900/1800)

This box is available as an option to provide an external -48 V plug on-site. The -48 V connection box is waterproof and can be put either in the BTS plinth or on-site outside the BTS. For more information, see Figure 35 "S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor BTS: -48 V connection box" (page 103).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture

97

The box can be fitted as suitable to the customer.

2.3.6.6 External alarm connection box (GSM 900/1800)


This box exists in two versions:

The outdoor version includes one or two ALPRO boards and the related primary protection modules. It protects up to 16 external alarms (8 for each ALPRO board) and four remote controls (two for each ALPRO board).

The external alarms connection box is waterproof and can be put either in the BTS plinth or on-site outside the BTS. For more information, see Figure 36 "External alarm connection box" (page 104).

The indoor includes one ALPRO board, which protects up to 8 external alarms and two remote controls. Two indoor version boxes can be put on the top of the S8000 indoor BTS, see Figure 30 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top" (page 98). One indoor version box can be put on the top of the S8003 BTS.

The box can be fitted as suitable to the customer.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

98 Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture Figure 30 S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 31 Top view of the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet

99

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

100

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 32 S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor: 75 ohms box type 1

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 33 S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor: 75 ohms box type 2

101

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

102

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 34 S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor BTS: PCM connection box

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS hardware architecture Figure 35 S8000/S8002/S8006 Outdoor BTS: -48 V connection box

103

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

104

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 36 External alarm connection box

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

105

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling


2.4.1 Connector plates
S8000 Outdoor BTS The antenna connectors are on the plate located at the bottom left side of the front of the cabinet, see Figure 37 "Antenna connectors for various coupling systems (maximum configurations)" (page 106). The following connectors are on the plates located at the bottom right side of the front of the cabinet, see Figure 38 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Connector plates" (page 107).

ABIS: external PCM links ALPRO 0: external alarm protection board 0 ALPRO 1: external alarm protection board 1 Batt cab dc: -48 V dc powering from the optional battery cabinet Batt cab alarm: battery cabinet alarms reported to ALCO board FH IN: transmission bus input for FP and TX data FH OUT: transmission bus output for FP and TX data PCM1: PCM1 bus O and M1: operations and maintenance 1 bus PCM2: PCM2 bus O and M2: operations and maintenance 2 bus

The O and M bus is used for the BCF only. S8000 Indoor BTS The antenna connectors are on the plate located on the top of the front of the cabinet. For more information, see Figure 37 "Antenna connectors for various coupling systems (maximum configurations)" (page 106). The following connectors are located on the right side of the cabinet frame:

ALPRO 0: external alarm protection board 0 ALPRO 1: external alarm protection board 1 FH IN: transmission bus input for FP and TX data FH OUT: transmission bus output for FP and TX data PCM: PCM bus O and M: O and M bus BCF alarms

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

106

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

The O and M bus is used for the BCF only. The external top connection kit, shown in Figure 116 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Base cabinet" (page 198) and Figure 39 "S8000 Indoor BTS: External top connection kit" (page 108) is installed when it is not possible to access the connectors on the right side of the cabinet frame.
Figure 37 Antenna connectors for various coupling systems (maximum configurations)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

107

Figure 38 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Connector plates

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

108

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 39 S8000 Indoor BTS: External top connection kit

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

109

S8002 BTS The antenna connectors are on the plates located at the bottom left side of the front of the cabinet. For more information, see Figure 37 "Antenna connectors for various coupling systems (maximum configurations)" (page 106). The following connectors are on the plates located at the bottom right side of the of the cabinet, see Figure 40 "S8002 Outdoor BTS bulkhead plates" (page 110):

ABIS: external PCM links PCM 2/3: PCM bus ALPRO 0: external alarm protection board 0 ALPRO 1: external alarm protection board 1 dc: -48 V dc power External alarms reported to RECAL board The antenna connectors are located on the top of

S8003 Indoor BTS the cabinet.

The following connectors are located on the top of the cabinet, see Figure 41 "External connectors of the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 111):

ALPRO 0: external alarm protection board 0 ABIS: external PCM links

S8006 BTS The antenna connectors are located on a plate at the bottom left side of the cabinet. For more information, see Figure 37 "Antenna connectors for various coupling systems (maximum configurations)" (page 106). The following connectors are located on a plate at the bottom right side of the cabinet, see Figure 42 "S8006 BTS: Connectors" (page 112):

Alpro 0: external alarm protection board 0 Alpro 1: external alarm protection board 1 Abis: external PCM links Battery cabinet: not used

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

110

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 40 S8002 Outdoor BTS bulkhead plates

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 41 External connectors of the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet

111

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

112

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 42 S8006 BTS: Connectors

2.4.2 Internal cabling

S8000 Indoor/Outdoor BTS The internal cabling on the front side is made for the most part through three interconnection modules, see Figure 43 "S8000 Indoor/ Outdoor BTS interconnection panels" (page 114):

the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 interconnection module (DRX-ICO) the combiner interconnection module (COMICO) the power amplifier interconnection module (PA-ICO)

These modules allow power and signal interconnections between the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3, PAs, splitters, and the coupling system. Figure 116 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Base cabinet" (page 198) shows the S8000 indoor cabling on the right side of the radio cabinet. S8002 BTS The internal cabling on the front side is made for the most part through three interconnection modules, see Figure 44 "S8002 Outdoor interconnection panel " (page 115):

the power amplifier interconnection module (C-PA-ICO) the main interconnection module (MAIN-ICO). the power interconnection module (POWER-ICO).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

113

The C-PA-ICO module provides the dc distribution for the PA and the F-type converters. The MAIN-ICO is a passive board, containing only connectors, fuses and resistors. It performs the digital interconnection between:

the two DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 the two PAs the CBCF theRECAL the duplexer

It provides the power supply for the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 (-48 V) and the duplexer (+/- 15 V). The S8002 standard configuration is O2. The POWER-ICO module distributes the dc for the CBCF, the USER rack and the RECAL.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

114

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 43 S8000 Indoor/ Outdoor BTS interconnection panels

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 44 S8002 Outdoor interconnection panel

115

S8003 Indoor BTS The internal cabling on the front side is made for the most part through two interconnection modules, see Figure 45 "Interconnection panel of the S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 116):

the DRX interconnection module (DRX-ICO) the combiner interconnection module (COMICO)

These modules allow power and signal interconnections between the DRXs, Splitters, and the coupling system. The PAs are cabled directly on the dc-main panel. S8006 BTS The internal cabling on the front side is made for the most part through three interconnection modules. For more information, see Figure 46 "S8006 BTS: Interconnection panels" (page 117).

the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 interconnection module (DRX-ICO) the combiner interconnection module (COMICO) the power amplifier interconnection module (PA-ICO)

These modules allow power and signal interconnections between the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3, PAs, splitters, and the coupling system.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

116

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 45 Interconnection panel of the S8003 Indoor BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 46 S8006 BTS: Interconnection panels

117

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

118

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.4.2.1 Radio cabling

The cabling of the BTS components varies depending on the site configuration and the coupling system used. The site configurations are identified using the following conventions:

"Ox" is a single-cell site (omnidirectional antennas) with x DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 in the site. "Sxy" is a two-cell site with x DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 in the first cell and y DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 in the second cell. "Sxyz" is a three-cell site with x DRXs in the first cell, y DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 in the second cell, and z DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 in the third cell.

The following figures present:

Transmission reception diagrams (page 119) BTS S8000 family cabling examples (page 127)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

119

Transmission reception diagrams


Figure 47 Transmission/reception diagram for a 1O2 configuration with duplexer coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

120

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 48 Transmission/reception diagram for a 1S211 configuration with duplexer coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

121

Figure 49 Transmission/reception for a S222 configuration with H2D coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

122

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 50 Transmission/reception for a 2S433 configuration with H2D coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

123

Figure 51 Transmission/reception diagram for a 1O8 configuration using H2D coupling system and four antennas

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

124

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 52 Transmission/reception diagram for a 1O8 configuration using H4D coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

125

Figure 53 Transmission/reception diagram for 1O8 configuration using duplexer and cavity system coupling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

126

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 54 Transmission/reception diagram for a 3S888 configuration using duplexer and cavity coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

127

BTS S8000 family cabling examples


Figure 55 S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabling for a 1S211 configuration with duplexer coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

128

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 56 S8000 Indoor BTS with a cavity combiner: Specific cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

129

Figure 57 S8000 Outdoor Omni 3 with 3 duplexers for each sector (mono-cabinet) cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

130

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 58 S8000 Outdoor/Indoor 3 sectors S33 with 3 duplexers for each sector (dual cabinet, main and extension) cabling

Figure 59 S8000 Outdoor/Indoor 3 sectors S333 with 3 duplexers for each sector (dual cabinet, main and extension) cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

131

Figure 60 S8000 Outdoor/Indoor Omni 6 with 6 duplexers cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

132

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 61 S8000 Outdoor BTS (base cabinet): Cabling for a 1S211 configuration with duplexer coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

133

Figure 62 S8002 BTS: Cabling for a 1O2 configuration with duplexer coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

134

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 63 S111 cabling for a S8003 Indoor BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

135

Figure 64 S8006 BTS: Cabling for a S222 configuration using H2D coupling system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

136

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.4.2.2 Other Cabling

Figure 65 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: ac and dc cabling" (page 137) to Figure 96 "S8002 BTS: BRC cabling" (page 168) present the cabling of following:

Power supply and ground cabling (page 137) Internal and external alarms cabling (page 147) PCM, O and M and Abis bus cabling (page 157) Batteries and BRC cabling (page 166)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

137

Power supply and ground cabling


Figure 65 S8000 Outdoor BTS: ac and dc cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

138

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 66 S8000 Indoor BTS: ac and dc cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

139

Figure 67 S8002 BTS: ac and dc cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

140

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 68 S8003 BTS: dc cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

141

Figure 69 S8006 BTS: ac and dc cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

142

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 70 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Ground cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

143

Figure 71 S8000 Indoor BTS: Ground cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

144

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 72 S8002 BTS: Ground cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

145

Figure 73 S8003 BTS: Ground cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

146

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 74 S8006 BTS: Ground cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

147

Internal and external alarms cabling


Figure 75 S8000 Outdoor BTS: External alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

148

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 76 S8000 Indoor BTS: External alarm cabling (with CBCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

149

Figure 77 S8000 Indoor BTS: External alarm cabling (with BCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

150

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 78 S8003 Indoor BTS: External alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

151

Figure 79 S8006 BTS: External alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

152

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 80 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Internal alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

153

Figure 81 S8002 BTS: Alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

154

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 82 S8006 BTS: Alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

155

Figure 83 S8000 Indoor BTS: Internal alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

156

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 84 S8003 Indoor BTS: Internal alarm cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

157

PCM, O and M and Abis bus cabling


Figure 85 S8000 Outdoor BTS: PCM bus cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

158

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 86 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Abis over IP cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

159

Figure 87 S8000 Indoor BTS: PCM bus and O and M bus cabling (with BCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

160

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 88 S8000 Outdoor BTS: O and M bus cabling (with BCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

161

Figure 89 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Abis cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

162

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 90 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Abis cabling (Isometric View)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

163

Figure 91 S8002 BTS: Abis and PCM bus cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

164

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 92 S8003 BTS: Abis bus cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

165

Figure 93 S8006 BTS: Abis and PCM bus cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

166

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Batteries and BRC cabling


Figure 94 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Batteries-BRC cabling without battery cabinet

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

167

Figure 95 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Batteries-BRC cabling with battery cabinet

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

168

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 96 S8002 BTS: BRC cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling

169

2.4.3 External cabling

The external connections are designed to connect the following, see Figure 97 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: External cabling with external alarm and PCM modules" (page 170) and Figure 102 "S8000 Indoor BTS: External cabling" (page 175):

external PCM links (Abis) transmission and reception antennas external alarm cables power supply and ground cables

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

170

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 97 S8000 Outdoor BTS: External cabling with external alarm and PCM modules

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 98 S8000 Outdoor BTS: External cabling with ALPRO-PRIPRO modules

171

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

172

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 99 S8002 BTS: External cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 100 S80003 BTS: External cabling

173

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

174

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 101 S8006 BTS: External cabling

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 102 S8000 Indoor BTS: External cabling

175

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

176

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

2.4.4 Inter-cabinet cabling

Inter-cabinet connections are designed to connect the following, see Figure 103 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Inter-cabinet cabling (with BCF)" (page 177) to Figure 106 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Inter-cabinet cabling (with CBCF)" (page 180):

PCM bus O and M bus (only with the ALCO board) BCF alarm (connection between the BCF cabinet and the S8000 Indoor cabinet)

The FH bus cabling to the extension cabinet is required only for configurations with more than 8 DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 for each cell.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 103 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Inter-cabinet cabling (with BCF)

177

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

178

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 104 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Inter-cabinet cabling (with CBCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS cabling Figure 105 S8000 Indoor BTS: Inter-cabinet cabling (with BCF cabinet)

179

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

180

Chapter 2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS architecture

Figure 106 S8000 Indoor BTS: Inter-cabinet cabling (with CBCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

181

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics


3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics
3.1.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS dimensions
Cabinet dimensions width: depth: height: width: depth: height: 135 cm 65 cm 160 cm 135 cm 112 cm 15 cm (53.1 in.) (25.6 in.) (63 in.) (53.1 in.) (44 in.) (6 in.)

Plinth dimensions

3.1.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS weight

The weight of the cabinet when empty (without battery, fan units or boards) is 164 kg (321.5 lb). A fully equipped cabinet can weigh up to 480 kg (1056 lbs) with ACU unit or 440 kg (968 lb) with DACS unit. This weight does not include the plinth. The CBCF module weighs 3.75 kg (8.30 lb). The plinth weighs 48.5 kg (107 lb).

3.1.3 S8000 Outdoor BTS operating temperature

To operate correctly, the BTS requires a temperature greater than -40C (-56F) and less than +50C (+122F).

Low speed: The HePA operates at a similar temperature in S8000 and S12000. The HePA temperature rise is in line with specification (+31C above ambient).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

182

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

High speed: The HePA operates 7C lower in S8000 than in S12000. TheHePA temperature rise is 2C lower than specification in S12000 (+29C above ambient). The HePA temperature rise is 9C lower than specification in S12000 (+22C above ambient).

3.1.4 S8000 Outdoor BTS climatic system

The climatic system controls the inside temperature of the cabinet. Low noise or normal operation is available. It is located in the top compartment of the cabinet. The climatic system can either consist of:

two Air Cooling Units: ACUs, or a Direct Ambient Cooling System: DACS or DACS "LN" (Low Noise).

3.1.4.1 With ACUs

Figure 107 "S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACU climatic system" (page 184) shows the S8000 Outdoor with an ACU climatic system. The top and main compartments communicate through main compartment air inlets and main compartment air outlets, see Figure 108 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Air circulation in the BTS with ACUs" (page 185). The top compartment has openings on the cabinet front panel that allow air to enter the cooling units and openings on the rear of the cabinet that allow the cooling units to fan air out of the cabinet. Each ACU includes a compressor (ac-powered), an evaporator, condenser coils and refrigerant lines, external and internal air blowers, 1000W heater (resistance plate heater), digital controller, internal and ambient air temperature sensors, air filters, EMI filters, ac/dc rectifier/alar m board and circuit breakers. The internal temperature sensors are used to regulate the temperature inside the cabinet. They are located on the climatic units, at the opening that enables air to pass from the main compartment to the top compartment. The ambient air temperature sensors enable the PCU to cut its dc power supply when the thresholds are exceeded. These sensors are located above the BCF or CBCF compartment or below the rectifiers. The external air blower is used to circulate the outside air across a condenser to extract heat from the refrigerant and expel heat to the outside air. The internal air blower circulates air through the BTS and over an evaporator to collect heat from the electronics.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

183

There are six LEDs on the front side of each cooling unit. These LEDs indicate the alarms detected on the following type of failure, see Figure 109 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: ACU climatic system diagram" (page 186):

CTRL (orange): The controller display is alarmed. FAN (orange): The fans for ambient air and internal equipment air are alarmed. Each airflow path contains sensors to measure the air blower speed for an air mover failure. HP (orange): The pressure inside the compressor is controlled to sense a high or low pressure for a compressor failure. CS (green) : At cold start the LED comes on if the ACUs are well ac-powered. dc (green) : The dc breaker is alarmed. ac (green) : The ac breaker is alarmed.

These LEDs are lit when healthy and off on alarm.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

184

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 107 S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACU climatic system

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics Figure 108 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Air circulation in the BTS with ACUs

185

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

186

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 109 S8000 Outdoor BTS: ACU climatic system diagram

On each cooling unit there is also a controller display (red 7-segment display) that indicates the internal air temperature. This controller display has two LEDs:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

187

COOL/DELAY (red): lit when the internal air temperature reaches 40C (104F). HEAT (red): lit when the heater is on. The ventilated air flow rate is 400 m3/hour

Technical characteristics (14.125 cubic feet/hour).

The maximum temperature of output air is +70C (158F).

3.1.4.2 With DACS

Figure 110 "S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS climatic system (type 1)" (page 188) and Figure 111 "S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS climatic system (type 2)" (page 189) show the S8000 Outdoor with an DACS climatic system. The operating principle is the following:

An air damper opens to admit external air (incoming air being filtered) and controls the inner cabinet environment by mixing appropriate amounts of outside and recirculated air. Twin blowers drive air down the rear duct and into the equipment enclosure through slots at the rear. Returned air to the cooling system is routed through two sets of holes in the base, with excess air being rejected from vents either located on either side of the system. For more information, see Figure 112 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Air circulation in the BTS with DACS or LN DACS" (page 190).

The internal temperature control is achieved by a high quality thermistor having an accuracy of 0.2 C (32,36F) between 0C (32F) and 70C (158F).This device is located in the left hand exit duct above a hole on the duct side; the hole ensures that the thermistor is constantly in a moving air stream, regardless of damper position. The operational mode of the Cooling system is solely dictated by the information provided by the thermistor. There are four operational modes:

Low temperature -40C (-56F) < Tcab C (59F) The heater is powered on, the damper is closed to the outside and air is recirculated through the holes in the base of the cooling system. Medium temperature 15C (59C) < Tcab C (104F) The heater is switched off, the damper remains closed and further heating of the equipment enclosure is achieved solely by the internal equipment loading.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

188

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 110 S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS climatic system (type 1)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics Figure 111 S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS climatic system (type 2)

189

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

190

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 112 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Air circulation in the BTS with DACS or LN DACS

Normal temperature Tcab = 40C (104F) The damper position is controlled automatically by the modulating motor, mixing appropriate amounts of recirculated and external air

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

191

to maintain a constant temperature. Excess air is rejected from the cooling system from vents at either side of the cooling system.

High temperature Tcab > 40C (104F) Although the damper is fully open, the cooling system is unable to keep the cabinet temperature to 40C (104F) which now rises in sympathy with the external temperature. At an outside temperature of 50C (122F), the internal cabinet will rise to a nominal 60C (140F) under fully loaded conditions.

The cooling system is supplied:

with two hard alarm outputs:

The first alarm output signals a fault on the cooling system The second one indicates a maintenance requirement for the filter

and with three alarm LEDs for on-site fault diagnostics:

The red LED indicates a critical alarm for fan failure The yellow LED indicates a critical alarm for heater circuit failure The green LED indicates a maintenance alarm for clogged filter
On the top of the cooling system, there is a window in the lid which allows the user to view the LEDs, see Figure 111 "S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS climatic system (type 2)" (page 189). The LEDs are normally lit when healthy and off on alarm. The cooling system is DC powered that allows internal or external battery back-up. The dc power consumption of the cooling system is 400-450 W. The cold start-up performance of the unit is controlled by an built-in ac to dc converter (for operation of the fans) and by a 2.5 kW heating element.

3.1.4.3 With LN (Low Noise) DACS

Figure 113 "S8000 Outdoor BTS with LN DACS climatic system" (page 192) shows the S8000 Outdoor with an "LN" DACS climatic system. The operating principle is the following:

The air damper opens to admit external air (incoming air being filtered) and controls the inner cabinet environment by mixing appropriate amounts of outside and recirculated air. The twin blowers drive air down the rear duct and into the equipment enclosure through slots at the rear. Returned air to the cooling system is routed through two sets of holes in the base, with excess air being rejected from vents located on either side of the system. For more information, see Figure 112 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Air circulation in the BTS with DACS or LN DACS" (page 190).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

192

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 113 S8000 Outdoor BTS with LN DACS climatic system

With "LN" DACS two operating modes of the twin blowers are available:

Full speed mode Control speed mode In this mode:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

193

if the temperature is > 45C (113F), the blowers run at full speed
(2500 rpm) (1800 rpm)

if the temperature is = 45C (113F), the blowers run at slow speed


The full speed mode or control speed mode is selected by switches located on the control board. For more information, see Figure 114 "Control board of climatic system with LN DACS" (page 194). The temperature control is achieved by two high quality thermistors that have an accuracy of 0.2 C (32,36F) between 0C (32F) and 70C (158F):

One is located in the left hand exit duct above a hole on the duct side. This hole ensures that the thermistor is constantly in a moving air stream, regardless of the damper position. The other one is located behind the air inlet, and measures the ambient air temperature.

The operational mode of the cooling system is determined solely by the information provided by the thermistor. The nominal internal operating temperature (Ts) is set by switches located on the control board. For more information, see Figure 114 "Control board of climatic system with LN DACS" (page 194). The factory presetting temperature is 35C (95F).
Table 3 Setting of nominal internal temperature Choice of nominal internal operating temperature (Ts) Switch (SW1/1) OFF ON Switch (SW1/2) ON ON Blower speed control Switch (SW1/3) ON (for full speed) ON (for full speed) Nominal internal operating temperature (Ts) +35C (+ 95F) +25C (+ 77F)

The operational mode of the cooling system is determined solely by the information provided by the thermistor.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

194

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 114 Control board of climatic system with LN DACS

There are four operational modes:

Low temperature -40C (-56F) < Tcab < 15C (59F) The heater is powered on, the damper is closed to the outside and air is recirculated through the holes in the base of the cooling system. Medium temperature 15C (59C) < Tcab < Ts
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

195

The heater is switched off, the damper remains closed and further heating of the equipment enclosure is achieved solely by the internal equipment loading.

Normal temperature Tcab = Ts The damper position is controlled automatically by the modulating motor, mixing appropriate amounts of recirculated and external air to maintain a constant temperature. Excess air is rejected from the cooling system from vents either side of the cooling system.

High temperature Tcab > Ts Although the damper is fully open, the cooling system is unable to keep the cabinet temperature to Ts which now rises with the external temperature. At an outside temperature of 50C (122F), the internal cabinet will rise to a nominal 60C (140F) under fully loaded conditions.

The cooling system is monitored by:

two hard alarm outputs:

The first alarm output signals a fault on the cooling system The second one indicates a maintenance requirement for the filter

three alarm LEDs for on-site fault diagnostics:

The red LED indicates a critical alarm for fan failure The yellow LED indicates a critical alarm for heater circuit failure The green LED indicates a maintenance alarm for clogged filter
On the top of the cooling system, there is a window in the lid which allows to view the LEDs. For more information, see Figure 111 "S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS climatic system (type 2)" (page 189). They are normally on when healthy and off on alarm. The cooling system is DC powered that allows internal or external battery back-up. The dc power consumption of the cooling system is 400-450W. The cold start-up performance of the unit is controlled by an built-in ac to dc converter (for operation of the fans) and by a 2.5 kW heating element.

3.1.5 S8000 Outdoor BTS plinth

The S8000 Outdoor BTS cabinet can be installed on a plinth, see Figure 115 "S8000 Outdoor BTS: Plinth diagram" (page 196), allowing for cable passage. The plinth characteristics are described in Nortel GSM BSS Overview (411-9001-001). The plinth may contain the external alarm connection box, the PCM connection box and the -48 V dc connection box. These boxes are screwed into the inside of the plinth.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

196

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 115 S8000 Outdoor BTS: Plinth diagram

3.2 S8000 Indoor BTS physical characteristics


3.2.1 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet dimensions
The S8000 Indoor BTS can be wall-mounted, or put on the floor. The base cabinet is shown in Figure 116 "S8000 Indoor BTS: Base cabinet" (page 198).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.2 S8000 Indoor BTS physical characteristics width: depth: height: 75 cm 45 cm 170 cm (29.5 in) (17.7 in) (67 in)

197

3.2.2 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet dimensions

The BCF cabinet can be wall-mounted or put on a support device and must not be placed further than 10 m (332") away from the base cabinet. The BCF cabinet is shown in Figure 117 "S8000 Indoor BTS: BCF cabinet" (page 199).
width: depth: height: 60 cm 37 cm 40 cm (23.6 in) (14.6 in) (15.7 in)

3.2.3 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet weight

The weight of the empty base cabinet, that is, without boards and ventilation units, is 140 kg (308 lb.). The fully equipped cabinet does not exceed 250 kg (551 lb). The CBCF module weighs 3.75 kg (8.30 lb).

3.2.4 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet weight

The BCF cabinet weighs less than 30 kg (66 lb). When the base cabinet is turned on, the external ambient air temperature must be between 0C (32F) and 45C (113F).

3.2.5 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet operating temperature

Once in operation, the base cabinet requires an external ambient air temperature above -5C (23F) and below 45C (113F).

3.2.6 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet operating temperature

When it is turned on, the BCF Cabinet requires an external ambient air temperature between 0C (32F) and 45C (113F). Once in operation, the BCF Cabinet requires an external ambient air temperature above -5C (23F) and below 45C (113F).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

198

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 116 S8000 Indoor BTS: Base cabinet

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.2 S8000 Indoor BTS physical characteristics Figure 117 S8000 Indoor BTS: BCF cabinet

199

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

200

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

3.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

The S8002 Outdoor BTS is a product initially dedicated to the railway market. It can be installed in indoor environments. The BTS has one base cabinet that includes a CBCF and two TRXs providing coverage to one cell. The maximum declarable sound power is 67dB(A) taking into account a 3 dB(A) margin. The S8002 Outdoor BTS can be installed on a plinth providing cable runways.
Base cabinet dimensions width: depth: height: height: 100 cm 54 cm 140 cm 10 cm (39.4 in) (21.6 in) (55.1 in) (4 in)

3.3.1 S8002 Outdoor BTS dimensions

Plinth dimension

3.3.2 S8002 Outdoor BTS weight

The weight of the cabinet when empty, that is, without its battery, is 240 kg (529 lb). A fully equipped cabinet can weigh up to 300 kg (662 lb). The weight of the plinth is 20 kg (44 lb).

3.3.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS operating temperature

To operate correctly, the BTS requires a temperature range of -40C (-56F) and less than + 50C (+ 122F).

3.3.4 S8002 Outdoor BTS climatic system

The Compact Direct Ambient Cooling System (CDACS) controls the inside temperature of the cabinet. Low noise or normal operation is available. It provides circulating air flow inside the cabinet through forced ventilation. The CDACS cools efficiently using two fans and a damper system to leverage air temperature variances both inside and outside the cabinet. It maintains an operating range of + 5C (41F) to + 50C (122F) inside the cabinet. If the inside temperature is below 5C (41F) at the time of start-up, the heaters switch on and when the temperature reaches 5C (41F), the BTS starts up. The CDACS is composed of two fans, one damper, one heater, one air filter and one controller. During normal operations, and when the internal temperature is above 0C, both dc and ac power are connected to the
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS physical characteristics

201

direct ambient environmental control system. When the internal air temperature of the BTS cabinet is below 0C (32F) only the ac power is available by the CDACS. The fans are equipped with their own ac/dc rectifier, which means that the system can even in this case operate at full specified performance. in case of ac failure, only the heating function is ensured. The internal temperature of the CDACS cabinet cannot be smaller than the ambient temperature. The fans can automatically switch from the ac/dc converter to the S8002 dc system supply. All components are easily accessible and can be changed on site. The dc power consumption of the CDACS is smaller than 360W. The cold start-up performance of the unit is controlled by a built-in ac to dc converter (for operation of the fan) and by a 1.25 KW heating element. The CDACS unit is supplied with two hard alarm outputs, and three LED indicators for on-site fault diagnostics (fan failure, heater failure, clogged filter). The first alarm output signals a fault on the CDACS unit, whereas the second one indicates a maintenance requirement for the filter. Two alarm outputs are available from the CDACS:

Alarm 1 relates a critical alarm failure condition that can be either a fan failure or a heater failure Alarm 2 relates only alarm filter blockage conditions

3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS physical characteristics

The S8003 BTS cabinet is an indoor cabinet and can be wall-mounted, or put on the floor. The BTS has one base cabinet that includes a CBCF and three TRXs maximum. The base cabinet is shown in Figure 118 "S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet" (page 203). The front view of the base cabinet with all modules and boards housed in the compartiments is presented in Figure 119 "Front view of the S8003 Indoor BTS" (page 204). S8003 Indoor BTS is identified on the OMC-R as an S8000 Indoor BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

202

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

3.4.1 S8003 Indoor BTS dimensions


Base cabinet dimensions width: depth: height: 75 cm 45 cm 115 cm (29.53 in) (17.72 in) (45.28 in)

3.4.2 S8003 Indoor BTS weight

A fully equipped cabinet can weigh up to 140 kg (308 lb). When the base cabinet is turned on, the external ambient air temperature must be between 0C (32F) and 45C (113F).

3.4.3 S8003 Indoor BTS operating temperature

Once in operation, the base cabinet requires an external ambient air temperature above -5C (23F) and below 45C (113F).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS physical characteristics Figure 118 S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet

203

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

204

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Figure 119 Front view of the S8003 Indoor BTS

3.5 S8006 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

The S8006 BTS, see Figure 120 "S8006 BTS: Base cabinet layout" (page 209), cabinet is an outdoor cabinet and can be installed in indoor environments. The BTS has one base cabinet (without extension or external cabinet) that includes a CBCF and six TRXs maximum.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 S8006 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

205

3.5.1 S8006 Outdoor BTS dimensions


Cabinet dimensions width depth height 135 cm 55 cm 130 cm (53.1 in) (21.6 in) (51.2 in)

3.5.2 S8006 Outdoor BTS weight

The weight of the cabinet when empty is 80 kg (264.6 lb). The weight of a fully equipped cabinet is 300 kg (661.4 lb).

3.5.3 S8006 Outdoor BTS operating temperature

To operate correctly, the BTS requires a temperature range of between -33C (-33F) and +45C (+117F). The operating principle is the following:

3.5.4 S8006 Outdoor BTS climatic system

When fully closed, the damper excludes outside air, and air is circulated within the BTS cabinet. When fully open, there is practically no recirculation within the BTS cabinet. So, the LNS-DACS operates in ambient air that is routed through an electronic equipment installed in the cabinet and ejected through the ducts located on the sides of the LNS-DACS. At intermediate positions, the damper is adjusted automatically to give a mix of recirculated and external air to achieve a nominal internal operating temperature of +25C (+77F). In a specific country, an optional setting could be used to achieve a nominal internal operating temperature of +35C (+95F).

For low external ambient air temperatures, the internal cabinet air temperature is maintained above +5C (+41F). With the LNS-DACS two operating modes are available:

full speed mode (optional) control speed mode In this mode:

if the temperature is > 35C (95F), the blowers run at full speed
(1800 rpm)

if the temperature is = 35C (95F), the blowers run at slow speed


The full speed mode or control speed mode is selected by switches located on the control board.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

206

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

The temperature control is achieved by two high quality thermistors that have an accuracy of 0.2 C (32,36F) between 0C (32F) and 70C (158F):

One is located inside a hole on the left-hand side panel. This hole ensures that the thermistor is constantly in a moving air stream, regardless of the damper position The other one is located inside the air inlet duct, and measures the ambient air temperature

Cooling system operational mode is determined solely by the information provided by the thermistor. The nominal internal operating temperature (Ts) is set by switches, see Table 3 "Setting of nominal internal temperature" (page 193), located on the control board. The factory presetting temperature is 35C (95F).
Table 4 Setting of nominal internal temperature Choice of nominal internal operating temperature (Ts) Switch (SW1/1) OFF ON Switch (SW1/2) ON ON Blower speed control Switch (SW1/3) ON (for full speed) ON (for full speed) Nominal internal operating temperature (Ts) +35C (+ 95F) +25C (+ 77F)

Cooling system operational mode is determined solely by the information provided by the thermistor. There are four operational modes:

Low temperature -40C (-56F) < Tcab < 10C (50F) The heater is powered on, the damper is closed to the outside and air is recirculated through the holes in the base of the cooling system. Medium temperature 10C (50C) <Tcab < Ts The heater is switched off, the damper remains closed and further heating of the equipment enclosure is achieved solely by the internal equipment loading.

Normal temperature Tcab = Ts The damper position is controlled automatically by the modulating motor, mixing appropriate amounts of recirculated and external air
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 S8006 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics

207

to maintain a constant temperature. Excess air is rejected from the cooling system from vents at either side of the cooling system.

High temperature Tcab > Ts Although the damper is fully open, the cooling system is unable to keep the cabinet temperature to Ts which now rises with the external temperature. At an outside temperature of 45C (113F), the internal cabinet will rise to a nominal 55C (131F) under fully loaded conditions.

The cooling system is monitored by:

two hard alarm outputs:

The first alarm output signals a fault on the cooling system The second one indicates a maintenance requirement for the filter

three alarm LEDs for on-site fault diagnostics:

The red LED indicates a critical alarm for fan failure The yellow LED indicates a critical alarm for heater circuit failure The green LED indicates a maintenance alarm for clogged filter
The LEDs are located on the front of the cooling system. The cooling system is required to operate at full specified performance, from a dc supply ranging from -40.5 V to -60 V (typically -54.5 V) and from an ac supply (typically 230 V +/- 10%). During normal operation, and when the internal air temperature of the BTS is above 0C (32F), both dc and ac powers are connected to the cooling system. When the internal air temperature of the BTS is below 0C (32F), only the ac power is available to the LNS-DACS. Under these conditions, the LNS-DACS uses its own internal ac/dc rectifiers to operate at full specified performance. The maximum dc power consumption is 360 W. The maximum current required to operate at full specified performance for the dc powered circuit, shall not exceed 4 A. The maximum current required to operate at full specified performance for the ac powered circuit, shall not exceed 10 A.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

208

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

The heater element is used to maintain the BTS cabinet above +10C (50F). It is located in a fan outlet duct. It has a rating of 1.25 kW at the nominal input of 230 Vac and is equipped with stainless steel fins, to maximize heat transfer. The element is turned off at +10C (50F), for rising temperature, and energized at +5C (41F) for failing temperature. The heater element is protected against over-heating, which can be caused by air failure or blockage within the BTS cabinet, by a manual reset thermostat located on a top of the fan discharge duct and over the element. It is programmed to set off an alarm at 106.5C (223.7F).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 S8006 Outdoor BTS physical characteristics Figure 120 S8006 BTS: Base cabinet layout

209

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

210

Chapter 3 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 physical characteristics

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

211

Chapter 4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 electrical characteristics


4.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS electrical characteristics
4.1.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply
Three input voltages can be installed on the S8000 Outdoor BTS:

single-phase 220-240 V ac three-phase 230-400 V ac split phase 240 V ac

4.1.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS power consumption

The maximum power the cabinet can consume is 8500 W in worst case consumption and in normal mode. This value does not take maintenance connectors and climatic units currents into account. The different power systems of the S8000 BTS are the following:

4.1.3 S8000 Outdoor BTS power system

S8000 outdoor BTS/S8006 BTS

the six-rectifier type Power system including a PCU module, up to


six 600 W or 680 W rectifiers. This power system is used with a ac mains box. Module, a Controller Module, and up to seven 500 W rectifiers. This power system is used with an AC mains box. System (GIPS) including a DCU, an ADU, and up to five 680 W rectifiers. The GIPS is used with the ac box/GIPS.

the seven-rectifier type Power system including a Distribution for the S8000 outdoor BTS only: the GSM Integrated Power

S8000 indoor

The Energy Supply Module including a PCU, up to five 680 W


rectifiers, a climatic unit, and a battery pack.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

212

Chapter 4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 electrical characteristics

4.1.4 S8000 Outdoor BTS internal battery autonomy

The internal battery is an optional equipment located in the top compartment. The battery backup time depends on the configuration and the BTS equipment and has a length of from around half an hour to a few hours.

4.2 S8000 Indoor BTS electrical characteristics


4.2.1 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet power supply
The power supply is -48 V dc. The power supply is -48 V dc.

4.2.2 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet power supply 4.2.3 S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet power consumption 4.2.4 S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet power consumption
The BCF cabinet maximum power consumption is 80 W.

The maximum power consumption of the base cabinet is 2080W.

4.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS electrical characteristics


4.3.1 S8002 Outdoor BTS power supply
Three input voltages can be installed on the S8002 Outdoor BTS:

single-phase 220-240 V ac dual-phase 230-400 V ac split phase 240 V ac

4.3.2 S8002 Outdoor BTS power consumption

The maximum power the cabinet can consume is 5410 VA in worst case consumption and in normal mode. The internal battery is located in the lower compartment. The battery backup time is 2 hours minimum.

4.3.3 S8002 Outdoor BTS internal battery autonomy

4.3.4 S8002 Outdoor BTS battery voltage thresholds and associated switches

When the battery is discharging (no AC mains), we reach a first threshold level, where part of the load is disconnected. If the battery continues to discharge, when the second threshold is reached, all remaining loads are switched off. The four switches (one per output) are semi conductors one, VMOS or bipolar. The backup time is a calculated value dedicated only to the batteries and is given with the accuracy of +/- 15 minutes. The value is for a backup of the entire BTS and therefore corresponds to the first threshold. If the
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.5 S8006 Outoor BTS electrical characteristics

213

mains fails, the BTS is backed up until the battery voltage is below 45 V dc. After this time, the PCU cuts off the supply to the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3, PA (or ePA or HePA) and the other units are powered until the battery voltage drops below 42 V dc.

4.4 S8003 Indoor BTS electrical characteristics


4.4.1 S8003 Indoor BTS power supply
The power supply is -48 V dc.

4.4.2 S8003 Indoor BTS power consumption

The maximum (worst case) power consumption (with redundancy) of the base cabinet is 1023W.

4.5 S8006 Outoor BTS electrical characteristics


4.5.1 S8006 Outdoor BTS power supply
One input voltage can be installed on the S8006 Outdoor BTS:

single-phase 220-240 V ac

4.5.2 S8006 Outdoor BTS power consumption

The power consumption does not exceed 16 Amps.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

214

Chapter 4 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 electrical characteristics

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

215

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description


5.1 Power amplier (PA)
5.1.1 Functional description
The power amplifier (PA) amplifies the GMSK signal from a low-level transmission unit and sends it to the transmission coupler. HePA is compatible with eDRX (all frequencies) and DRX ND3 (900) and with the indoor and outdoor S8000 and S12000 cabinets. The cabinet can contain a maximum of 12 HePAs. Three types of PA are available : PA, ePA and HePA (high power amplifier). The HePA can be used mixed with PA and ePA. PA and ePA are class 5 amplifiers, that is, they can provide power of between 20 W and 40 W. Nominal power is 30 W. HePA is the BTS Power Amplifier with transmit power up to 60 W in GMSK and is Edge compatible. HePA is compatible with S8000 CBCF and works with eDRX/eDRX2. HePA is not compatible with DRX and DRX ND3. The HePA can be mixed with PA in step coupling configurations. It can be mixed with (e)PA in a normal cell if its power is being configured with a value that is compatible with (e)PA (lower than 30 Watt). The range of value of the OMC parameter "bsTxPwrMax" that sets the power of the TRX, already permits to configure power up to 60 Watts. The HePA is differentiated at the OMC from PA and ePA; in the same way the ePA is differentiated from the PA.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

216

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

It contains its own dc/dc converter and contains a microcontroller which allows it to dialog box with the low-power transmission module. This function makes it possible to move the power amplifier to the top of the tower if necessary. The power amplifier provides several alarms:

an overtemperature alarm, whose threshold is set in the PA an overvoltage alarm, whose threshold is set in the PA an alarm indicating that the PA output reflected power is exceeded This alarm is triggered when the reflect power exceeds 6W. an alarm dedicated to the dc/dc converter a communication alarm This alarm is triggered by a parity bit error or control byte error. an input power alarm, whose threshold is set in the PA The DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 must then reduce its output level (PA input level) to make the alarm disappear. a consumed current alarm whose threshold is set in the PA

5.1.2 Physical description 5.1.2.1 Power supply

The power amplifier receives a 48 V power supply from the cabinet. The converter accepts an input voltage between 36 V and 57 V (nominally 48 V). It then provides the regulated 24 V voltage needed for operation of the PA radio stages. The type 1 power amplifier can have a switch to cut off the 48 V incoming line. Maximum consumption is 230Wfor PA and ePA, and 290Wfor HePA 1900MHz or 230 W for HePA 900 MHz. Actual consumptions are lower, with a typical maximum of 170 W for ePAs, 259 W for HePA 1900 and 194 W for HePA 900.

The power amplifier connectors are located on the front panel, see Figure 121 "S8000 BTS: Power amplifier (type 1)" (page 217) to Figure 124 "S8000 BTS: High Power Amplifier (HePA)" (page 220).

5.1.2.2 Connectors

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.1 Power amplifier (PA) Figure 121 S8000 BTS: Power amplifier (type 1)

217

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

218

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 122 S8000 BTS: Power amplifier (type 1) without switch I/O

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.1 Power amplifier (PA) Figure 123 S8000 and S8003 BTS: Power amplifier (type 2)

219

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

220

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 124 S8000 BTS: High Power Amplifier (HePA)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.2 ALCO board

221

Radio connectors

There are three radio connectors:

The radio input connector, marked "RF IN", is a female, SMA connector. The radio output connector, marked "RF OUT", is a female, N-type connector. The test connector, marked "RF SAMPLE", is a female, SMA connector. According to to the PA type, the connector is optional.

Tx (HePA to Combiner modules) cables: All QN-QN cables must be 60W power handling for all HePA frequency variants. Voltage supply connector The -48 V supply of the PA is supplied through a male, three-pin connector.

5.2 ALCO board

The ALCO is the alarm management unit used with the BCF Cabinet (S8000 Indoor) or the BCF Unit (S8000 Outdoor). The ALCO board collects and manages internal and external BTS alarms. The board has a PCM interface to allow a connection between the BCF and certain transmission couplers. There is one ALCO board for each cabinet.

5.2.1 Functional description

The ALCO board is comprised of several function blocks, see Figure 125 "ALCO board functional diagram" (page 223):

The CU block is the boards central management unit. The communication block provides a link with the CSWM board over the O and M bus. The board groups communication interfaces with:

the BCF, by means of the internal private PCM link the transmission coupler(s), by means of the private PCM

The alarm block manages alarms. The test block includes several test interfaces. The power supply block converts the 48 V dc power supply distributed by the BTS to 5 V dc and 12 V dc.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

222

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The identification and LEDs block identifies the cabinet number and board version, and controls signaling LEDs. The private PCM block is not connected to the other function blocks. It consists of an interface between the GTW board and certain transmission couplers. It also has a J64 interface, using TS 25 of the first PCM.

5.2.1.1 Alarm management

The ALCO board manages three types of alarms:

internals alarms unprotected external alarms protected external alarms

Internal alarms The ALCO board is designed to detect up to 56 internal alarm logical signals (0/+5 V). An alarm is detected when the voltage exceeds a threshold of 2.5 V. When no alarm is detected, a reference zero-volt is applied to the threshold comparator input. These connectors are protected against power surges of less than 57 A for a for eachiod of 1 ms, and against power surges of less than 180 mA at all times.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.2 ALCO board Figure 125 ALCO board functional diagram

223

Unprotected external alarms The ALCO board can manage 32 unprotected external alarms, the same electrically as the internal alarms. These alarms are intended to be connected inside the cabinet, or near the cabinet in a protected environment, that is, not exposed to major electrical power surges.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

224

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Protected external alarms The ALCO board protects up to 16 external alarms which are 12 mA current loops. An alarm is detected when a loop opens. These inputs are protected by the ALPRO board, a special protection board inside the BTS. Analog input channels The ALCO board reads four analog channels (voltage 0 to 5 V) converted to digital signals by an eight-bit, single-pole analog-to-digital converter. These inputs are protected against voltages of several tens of volts. Remote controls Four dry-contact relays are controlled by the ALCO board and protected by the ALPRO board. They are all-or-nothing relays with a maximum current of 80 mA and a maximum voltage of 72 V dc.

5.2.2 Physical description

This section describes the front panel, the LEDs, the connectors, and the electrical characteristics of the ALCO board.

5.2.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of the ALCO board has the following:

one reset button three LEDs eight connectors

The reset button allows a hard reset of the board. The front panel of the ALCO board is shown in Figure 126 "ALCO board" (page 225).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.2 ALCO board Figure 126 ALCO board

225

5.2.2.2 LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front panel of the ALCO board, described in Table 5 "LEDs on the front panel of the ALCO board" (page 226).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

226

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Table 5 LEDs on the front panel of the ALCO board Type Board state indicators No. of LEDs 1 1 1 Legend: BIST: Built-In Self Test RDY: Ready Label (color) BIST (yellow) +5 V (green) RDY (green) Meaning (when lit) The built-in self-test is running or is stopped with a default result. The power is on. The board is operating normally.

5.2.2.3 Connectors

There are eight connectors located on the front panel of the ALCO board, identified in Table 6 "ALCO board connectors" (page 226). In addition, there is a debug connector located on the inside of the board.
Table 6 ALCO board connectors Connector Label PCM J64 INT O and M in PWR PCM out EXT. NP. EXT. P. Type 50-pin female 9-pin male 62-pin female 25-pin male 3-pin male 25-pin female 50-pin female 50-pin female Purpose PCM lines to and from the BCF and cabinet reference number. Wired to a connector on the inside of the board. J64 Interface connector. Internal alarm connector. O and M connector, wired to a connector on the inside of the board. Power connector. PCM transmission coupler control connector. Connector for unprotected external alarms and analog detectors. Wired to connector on the inside of the board. Connector for remote control protected external alarms. Wired to connector on the inside of the board.

5.3 RECAL board


5.3.1 Functional description
The RECAL board is the alarm management unit used with the CBCF. The RECAL collects external and internal alarm loops and alarms associated with OEM equipment.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.3 RECAL board

227

A slave of the CBCF, the RECAL board sends alarms to the CBCF over a Private PCM link. The CBCF signals the BSC when there is an alarm. There is one RECAL board for each cabinet. The following functional blocks of the RECAL board are:

control unit alarm interfaces communication interfaces power supply

5.3.1.1 Alarm management

The RECAL board collects three types of alarms:

internal alarms unprotected external alarms protected external alarms

Internal alarms The RECAL board detects up to 56 internal alarms logical signals. Internal alarms are wire loops that can only be opened or closed by dry contacts or open collectors. A closed loop forces a low logic level (less than 1.35 V) on the trigger output, which indicates that there is no alarm. An open loop forces a high logic level (greater than 3.15 V) on the trigger output. The CPU runs polling sequences to recognize the alarm state. Unprotected external alarms The RECAL board detects unprotected external alarms the same electrically as the internal alarms, which can be used inside the cabinet or within a few meters outside the cabinet.

ATTENTION

Indicates that specific equipment and specific software (such as specific software in the BSC) dedicated to Railway application is used and that therefore the feature is not available for all preliminary GSM users.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

228

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Table 7 User alarms Existing external user alarms S8000 Outdoor BTS S8000 Indoor BTS S8002 BTS S8003 BTS 6 6 Additional external user alarms (GSM-R specific) 14 20 24

Protected external alarms The RECAL board detects up to 16 protected external alarms. These alarms can be used outside the cabinet by adding two ALPRO boards (for S8000 Indoor/Outdoor BTS) or one ALPRO board (for S8003 indoor BTS) which each manage 8 alarms. A closed loop forces a low logic level (0 mA) on the optocoupler collector, indicating that there is no alarm. An open loop forces a high logic level (5 mA) on the optocoupler collector, indicating that there is an alarm.

ATTENTION

Indicates that specific equipment and specific software (such as specific software in the BSC) dedicated to Railway application is used and that therefore the feature is not available for all preliminary GSM users.

Note that due to the absence of the battery remote controller (BRC) for the S8000 Indoor BTS and the S8003 Indoor BTS, the application of the battery remote maintenance feature only consists in providing a possibility to use an external telecommand to switch off the main power and operate on batteries and to switch back to main power. The operation is performed using the external remote commands (close/open relay) accessible through the ALPRO box connected to the EXT. P. connector of the RECAL board.

5.3.1.2 Analog to digital inputs

The RECAL board reads four analog channels (voltage 0 to 5 V dc) that are converted in digital signals by an eight-bits signal into a analog/digital converter.

5.3.1.3 Remote control outputs

Four remote control relay outputs are provided with a maximum current of 80 mA and a maximum voltage of 72 V dc.

5.3.2 Physical description

This section describes the LEDs, connectors, and the electrical characteristics of the RECAL board.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.3 RECAL board

229

5.3.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of the RECAL board has the following:

one reset button three LEDs six connectors

The reset button allows a hard reset of the board. The front panel of the RECAL board is shown in Figure 127 "RECAL board" (page 230).

5.3.2.2 LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front panel of the RECAL board.
Table 8 LEDs on the front panel of the RECAL board Type Board state indicators No. of LEDs 1 1 1 Legend: BIST: Built-In Self Test RDY: Ready Label (color) BIST (yellow) +5 V (green) RDY (green) Meaning (when lit) The built-in self-test is running or is stopped with a default result. The power is on. The board is operating normally.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

230

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 127 RECAL board

5.3.2.3 Connectors

There are six connectors on the front panel of the RECAL board, which are wired to corresponding connectors on left/right side of the board. For more information, see Figure 127 "RECAL board" (page 230).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.3 RECAL board

231

Additionally, there are two connectors that are accessible only from inside the board. The connectors are identified in Table 9 "RECAL board connectors" (page 231) .
Table 9 RECAL board connectors Access Front panel No. of connectors 1 Label PCM Type SCSI 50-pin female Purpose PCM lines to and from the CBCF and cabinet reference number. Wired to the P4 connector soldered on the inside of the board. The debug port (P0) inside the board is connected to the PCM connector. 48 V dc Power supply input. PCM lines to and from cavities. Wired to the P6 connector soldered on the inside of the board. 56 internal alarms (32 to 87). Wired to the P3 connector soldered on the inside of the board. 16 external protected alarms and 4 remote control outputs. Wired to the P5 connector soldered on the inside of the board. 32 internal alarms (0 to 31) and 4 analog to digital conversion channels. Wired to the P2 connector soldered on the inside of the board. Debugging port (the connector is not equipped). EDLP Programming port, used in the factory to program the EDLP.

1 1

PWR PCM Out

Sub-D 3-pin male Type 3W3 Sub-D 25-pin female

INT

Sub-D high density 62-pin female

EXT. P.

Sub-D 50-pin female

EXT.NP.

Sub-D 50-pin female

Inside the board

1 1

P0 P1

Sub-D 9-pin male 10-pin male

Legend: RXDBG: Reception Debug TXDBG: Transmission Debug


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

232

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

PCBUG: Console presence SEL: Selector H4M: 4 MHz clock SY: Frame synchronization signal MICE: Transmit PCM line MICR: Receive PCM line GND: Ground

5.3.2.4 Electrical characteristics

The RECAL board is powered by a nominal 48 V dc. The nominal supply current is approximately 600 mA. A dc/dc converter (48 V to 5 V) on the board supplies logic circuits with +5 V dc. The +5 V dc supply is available on the EXT.P external connector (and P5 internal connector) for the possible heating resistors mounted on the ALPRO boards. A second dc/dc isolated stages converter (5 V to 12 V) provides external alarm detection circuits with +12 V dc isolated supply. A CEM filter is designed on the board between 48 V dc input and the primary stage of the dc/dc (48 V to 5 V) converter. Its maximum consumption is 15 W.

5.4 ALPRO board

The ALPRO board protects up to eight external alarms and up to two remote controls of the ALCO or RECAL board. The external alarms and remote controls are intended to be connected to equipment outside the cabinets. This equipment may be connected, temporarily or permanently, to outside line conductors affected by electrical disturbances. The ALPRO board protects against these disturbances. One ALPRO board protects half of the external interfaces available in the ALCO or RECAL board. There may therefore be two ALPRO boards for one ALCO board. Depending on how many external alarms are used, one or two ALPRO boards may be installed.

5.4.1 Functional description

ATTENTION

Depending on how many external alarms are used and whether the S8000 Outdoor or S8003 Indoor BTS configuration is available, one or two ALPRO boards may be installed. For S8003 indoor BTS, only one ALPRO board may be installed. One ALPRO board protects 8 alarms maximum.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.4 ALPRO board

233

5.4.2 Physical description

The ALPRO board, see Figure 128 "ALPRO board" (page 234), presented in S8000 Outdoor configuration or in S8003 indoor configuration) provides only secondary protection. Primary protection devices are associated with the board to protect the lines themselves. A cable linking the board ground to a cabinet ground bar discharges energy caused by outside disturbances.

5.4.2.1 External alarm protection circuit

The first part of the external alarm protection circuit comprises a surge arrestor and thermal resistors, which protect the board against power surges and limit the current in wires and connectors. The second part limits the voltage and current returning to the ALCO or RECAL board. It consists of transils and thermal resistors.

5.4.2.2 Remote control protection circuit

The first part of the remote control protection circuit comprises a surge arrestor and thermal resistors, which protect the board against power surges and limit the current in wires and connectors. The second part protects the relays and connections of the ALCO or RECAL board. It consists mainly of thermal resistors.

5.4.2.3 S8000 Outdoor BTS environmental conditions

The ALPRO board is located in a sealed environment inside the skirting of the cabinet. It is designed to operate at temperatures between -40 C (-40F) and +80C (176F). Two thermoresistors supplied with +5 V prevent condensation inside the case of the ALPRO card.

5.4.2.4 S8000 Indoor BTS environmental conditions

ALPRO modules are located at the top of the radio cabinet. The precise location is presented on the overview figure.

5.4.2.5 S8003 Indoor BTS environmental conditions

One ALPRO module is located at the top of the radio cabinet. The precise location is presented on the overview figure.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

234

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 128 ALPRO board

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.5 F-type converter

235

5.5 F-type converter


5.5.1 Functional description
The F-type converter converts a 48 V dc voltage into two power sources, -15 V and +15 V. It powers the radio equipment such as the Low Noise Amplifiers (LNA), the variable gain amplifiers and the VSWR measuring devices. The F-type converter has a switch on its front panel that can be used to disconnect the input voltage. It also has two outputs that can be connected in parallel with identical outputs of another F-type converter.

5.5.2 Physical description

5.5.2.1 Input voltage

Nominal input voltage: 48 V (40.5 V to 57 V)

5.5.2.2 Output voltages

The two output voltages supplied by the converter are as follows:

Source 1:
Nominal voltage: +15V Nominal current: 7 A

Source 2:
Nominal voltage: -15V Nominal current: 4 A

Output voltages can be individually adjusted up to +15% and -5% of nominal voltage.

5.5.2.3 Alarms

Several alarm signals can be generated, in the following cases:

One of the two output voltages is either lower than the Low Voltage Limit (LVL) or higher than the High Voltage Limit (HVL). These limit voltages are:

LVL: 13.25 V 0.25 V HVL: 18.5 V 0.5 V

The switch on the front panel is set to "OFF". The converter temperature is too high.

Finally, an event alarm is generated when there is a logic OR between the other alarms.

5.5.2.4 Front panel

The F-type converter front panel has several connectors and LEDs. For more information, see Figure 129 "F-type converter" (page 236).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

236

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

LEDs Two green LEDs provide information on the status of the converter.
Figure 129 F-type converter

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner

237

5.6 RF Combiner
5.6.1 Functional description
There are four types of RF Combiner modules:

duplexer-only (D) hybrid two-way duplexer (H2D) hybrid four-way duplexer (H4D) (not used for S8003 Indoor BTS) eight-way cavity combiner (CC8) (not used for S8003 Indoor BTS)

The functional diagrams of each RF Combiner type are shown in Figure 130 "Duplexer-only (D) RF combiner diagram (S8000 BTS and S8003 BTS)" (page 238) to Figure 133 "Cavity combiner diagram (S8000/S8002/S8006 BTS)" (page 241). 5.6.1.1 Duplexer (page 237) describes the components in each type of RF Combiner module.
Table 10 Content of RF combiner modules RF Combiner Type D Contents

H2D

H4D (not used for S8003 Indoor BTS)

CC8 (not used for S8003 Indoor BTS)

Duplexer Reception Amplifier (LNA splitter) VSWR Meter (optional) Duplexer Reception Amplifier (LNA splitter) Two-way transmission coupling (H2D) VSWR Meter (optional) Duplexer Reception Amplifier (LNA splitter) Four-way transmission coupling (H4D) VSWR Meter (optional) egiht-way cavity combiner

5.6.1.1 Duplexer

The duplexer allows transmission and reception to occur on the same antenna. This reduces the number of antennas required for a cabinet. The duplexer also performs filtering for reception and transmission. When no receive filtering or transmit coupling is required, then the Tx-Filter (TxF) module can be used instead of the duplexer.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

238

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 130 Duplexer-only (D) RF combiner diagram (S8000 BTS and S8003 BTS)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner Figure 131 H2D RF combiner diagram (S8000 BTS and S8003 BTS)

239

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

240

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 132 H4D RF combiner diagram (S8000 BTS)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner Figure 133 Cavity combiner diagram (S8000/S8002/S8006 BTS)

241

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

242

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.6.1.2 Reception amplifier

The reception signal amplifier, also called the LNA-splitter, has two functions:

amplifies the signal from the antenna using a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) splits the signal from the antenna into four signals

The LNA-splitter has the following attenuation or gain values: The LNA has a nominal gain of 28.5dB (GSM 900) and 32 dB (GSM 1800/1900). The two splitter stages cause attenuation less than 7 dB. A 2dB attenuator handles differences in cable attenuation between the two extension outputs (EXT) and the two internal outputs (INT). The two extension outlets, which are not used at present, will make future configuration upgrades possible.

The LNA-splitter is supplied with + 15 V dc (+ 5%) and its maximum current consumption is 370 mA (+ 15 V), 50 mA (- 15 V). The module generates an alarm if LNA consumption deviates by more than 30% from the nominal value. On the front of the LNA-splitter board, there is a 9-pin male connector.

5.6.1.3 Hybrid transmission coupling

According to the hybrid coupling type, transmission coupling consists of a single hybrid coupler for H2D configurations or three hybrid couplers mounted in two stages for H4D configurations. The two-way hybrid coupler (H2D) consists of:

two isolators, one at each input port, which allows the protection of the power amplifier (PA) against reflected signals, and also permits the isolation necessary between transmitters a hybrid coupler, which combines two transmission signals on only one port.

This subsystem is part of the RF Combiner module (H2D, or H4D). The maximum attenuation is an RF Combiner module is dedicated to one frequency band.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner

243

When any transmission coupling system is requested (in the case of one TRX per antenna), the Tx-Filter (TxF) module can be used with two duplexer-only (D) modules in order to provide Rx main and diversity signals. The Tx-Filter module is dedicated to one frequency band. For more information about the Tx-Filter, see 5.7 Tx-Filter module (page 252). RF cable and H2D RF Combiner (includes duplexer, LNA splitter and H2 Tx coupler) must be compatible with HePA delivered power level. The following table identifies the H2D frequency variants and their 60W readiness (Yes or No).
Designation H2D 850 W/VSWR H2D 850 W/O VSWR H2D 850 SMR W/VSWR H2D 850 SMR W/O VSWR H2D GSM (W/ VSWR_GSM/UMTS) H2D GSM (W/O VSWR_GSM/UMTS H2D EGSM WITH VSWR H2D EGSM W/O VSWR H2D DCS (W/ VSWR_GSM/UMTS) H2D DCS (W/O VSWR_GSM/UMTS) H2D DCS 60W W/VSWR GSM TE H2D DCS 60W W/O VSWR GSM TE HDPL 1900 W/VSWR HDPL 1900 W/O VSWR H2D HEPA HANDLING W VSWR 19 H2D HEPA HANDLING W/O VSWR 19 60W power handling YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO YES YES NO NO YES YES

5.6.1.4 VSWR-meter

The VSWR-meter can be included as an optional unit in the RF Combiner module or in the Tx-Filter module.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

244

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The VSWR-meter allows the signal strength of the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) to be monitored on the antenna connector and to verify the connection between the antenna and the BTS. This module needs BTS signals transmission to be able to switch on (no alarm with "Receive antenna" only) The VSWR-meter receives transmitted and reflected signals sampled through two directional antennas located inside the duplexer unit or Tx-Filter unit.

ATTENTION

The three alarms are monitored through three input pins connected to the Alarm Module of the BTS. The exception is BTS configuration with TX filter, where only VSWR level 2 and level 3 alarms are monitored due to the lack of input port.

The transmit and receive signals are first converted into two dc voltages by using envelope detection. Two logarithmic amplifiers, one for transmit power signal, and one for reflected power signal, then amplify both converted signals. The two channels are added and subtracted to obtain the stationary wave ratio. This value is compared to three thresholds (1.7:1, 2:1, and 3:1), each of which triggers an alarm if it is exceeded.

5.6.1.5 Remote tunable cavity combiner

The remote tunable cavity combiner is used for the 1800 GSM frequency band. It is only available for the S8000 Indoor BTS equipped with a CBCF module. It consists of eight-way cavities; each of them tuned at the frequency corresponding to the transmitter connected to it. In cavity coupling mode, the transmiter is set to work at a single frequency (the coupler frequency). It permanently scans all FH bus links coming from the Frame Processors. When it detects an indication that data is to be transmitted on its own frequency, it reads and transmits it on its radio channel. Baseband frequency hopping requires as many transmitters as the number of frequency used. Of course, at any time the frame processor uses just one transmitter, which means that other transmitters may be used for other frame. processors, if required.
Carrier spacing 600 kHz 1.2 MHz Guaranteed transmit power at antenna connector 37.5 dBm 38 dBm Typical transmit power at antenna connector 39 dBm 39.5 dBm

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner

245

Characteristics These values are valid for configurations up to 16 DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 for each cell. The following are the various components of a cavity combiner:

8 isolators (one for each transmitter), to reduce intermodulation between transmitters (TXs) 8 remotely adjustable cavities (one for each transmitter) 1 unit to concentrate the TX inputs to a single output (transmit antenna) 1 output filter to limit interference generated by the transmitters (only on the main coupler) 1 power converter 1 controller, responsible for the hardware and software functions of the coupler

5.6.2 Physical description

The front panels of the RF Combiner types are shown in Figure 134 "Duplexer-only (D) RF combiner (S8000 BTS and S8003 BTS)" (page 247) to Figure 137 "Four-way hybrid duplexer (H4D 1900 Mhz) RF combiner" (page 250) .

5.6.2.1 Duplexer

The duplexer connectors on the front panel of the RF Combiner are:

a female 7/16 antenna connector a female N type transmission connector a female, SMA type connector (Rev) a female, SMA type connector (Fwd)

A female, SMA type reception connector is present at the rear of the duplexer.

5.6.2.2 LNA-splitter

The connectors on the LNA-splitter front panel are:

two female, SMA type, output (EXT) connectors to the RX-splitter of the extension rack two female, SMA type, RX-splitter output (INT) connectors a male, 9-pin power supply connector

A female, SMA type, radio signal input connector is present at the rear of the LNA-splitter.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

246

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.6.2.3 Transmission coupling

For duplexer-only configurations, the transmission signal input connector on the front panel is a female, N type connector (TX-in). Duplexer Tx input is described hereafter. For H2D configurations, the connectors on the front panel are:

two female, N type, transmission signal input connectors (PA in) a female, N type, output connector (TX-out) a female, N type input connector (TX-in). Duplexer Tx input is described hereafter.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner Figure 134 Duplexer-only (D) RF combiner (S8000 BTS and S8003 BTS)

247

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

248

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 135 Two-way hybrid duplexer (H2D) RF combiner (S8000 BTS and S8003 BTS)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner Figure 136 Four-way hybrid duplexer (H4D 1800/900 Mhz) RF combiner

249

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

250

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 137 Four-way hybrid duplexer (H4D 1900 Mhz) RF combiner

For H4D configurations, the connectors on the front panel are:

four female, N type, transmission signal input connectors (PA-in) a female, N type, output connector (TX-out) a female, N type, input connector (TX-in). Duplexer Tx input is described hereafter.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.6 RF Combiner

251

5.6.2.4 VSWR-meter

The connectors on the VSWR-meter front panel are:

a female, SMA type, reflected power connector (Rev) a female, SMA type, transmitted power connector (Fwd) a male 9-pin, sub-D connector for power supply and alarms.

ATTENTION

The three alarms are monitored through three input pins connected to the Alarm Module of the BTS. The exception is BTS configuration with TX filter, where only VSWR level 2 and level 3 alarms are monitored due to the lack of input port.

5.6.2.5 Remote tunable cavity combiner

The front panel has the following elements, see Figure 138 "Remote tunable cavity combiner: Front panel " (page 252):

20 LEDs

8 parking: color yellow 8 tune : color green (flashing when tuning and red when channel
is faulty)

1 autotest: color yellow 1 local RS232: color red 1 power: color green (red when secondary voltage is faulty) 1 remote PCM: color green

8 TX-in connectors: N female type 1 TX-out connector: N female type 1 local RS232 connector: Sub-D 9 points male type 1 power connector: Sub-D 3W3 male type 1 remote PCM connector: Sub-D 25 points male type

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

252

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 138 Remote tunable cavity combiner: Front panel

5.7 Tx-Filter module


5.7.1 Functional description
The purpose of the Tx-Filter (TxF) is to filter the transmitted signal and to protect the power amplifier (PA). The TxF does not contain a transmission coupling system or a receiver filter.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.7 Tx-Filter module

253

5.7.2 Physical description

The Tx-Filter module is composed of the following, see Figure 139 "Tx-Filter (TX-F) module" (page 254):

a transceiver filter unit a coupling system dedicated to the VSWR-meter an optional VSWR-meter that monitors the link between the BTS and the antenna.

The Tx-Filter module is used with the duplexer-only RF Combiner (D) to extend configurations beyond two DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 for each cell. The Tx Filter does not perform reception functions and must be used with the RF Combiner (D) to ensure reception distribution. The Tx-Filter module can be equipped with an optional VSWR-meter which shares the same front panel so that there is only one unit to plug into the BTS rack. With or without the optional VSWR-meter, the Tx-Filter module is half the size of the two-way hybrid (H2D) and duplexer-only (D) RF Combiner.

VSWR-meter

The function of the VSWR-meter, see 5.6 RF Combiner (page 237), is described in the section "RF Combiner". The VSWR-meter connectors on the front panel of the Tx-Filter are the same as those of the RF Combiner and are described in the section "RF Combiner connectors". Althrough the VSWR-meter delivers three alarm lines, only two are reported to the OMC-R because of COMICO constraints. These alarm thresholds correspond to 2:1 and 3:1 VSWR values.

ATTENTION

The three alarms are monitored through three input pins connected to the Alarm Module of the BTS. The exception is BTS configuration with TX filter, where only VSWR level 2 and level 3 alarms are monitored due to the lack of input port.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

254

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 139 Tx-Filter (TX-F) module

5.8 BCF unit


5.8.1 Functional description
The BCF performs functions common for a site. The BCF also manages its alarm management unit, the ALCO board.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.8 BCF unit

255

5.8.2 Physical description

5.9 PCMI board of the BCF unit (page 256) to 5.15 PSCMD board of the BCF unit (page 276) describe the following boards contained in the BCF Unit (S8000 Outdoor) and BCF Cabinet (S8000 Indoor):

PCMI GTW CSWM DSC SYNC BCF Converter PSCMD

5.8.3 Mapping of CBCF functions to BCF functions


A BTS contains

either a BCF unit or a CBCF Module (for S8000 Indoor BTS and S8000 Outdoor BTS) a CBCF Module (for S8003 Indoor BTS)

See Table 15 "Table mapping of BCF and CBCF boards and functions" (page 281) for a summary of the mapping between the functions and boards of the BCF and CBCF.
Table 11 Table mapping of BCF and CBCF boards and functions Function BSC or BTS Interface (through PCM link) Module management and switching Synchronization of site equipment and GSM Time distribution Concentration of signaling channels Manages the alarm management unit, a slave of the BCF or CBCF Note: The ALCO board is an alarm management unit used with the BCF, while the RECAL board is used with the CBCF. Power conversion CBCF Board CPCMI CMCF CMCF CMCF CMCF BCF Board PCMI CSWM SYNC GTW DSC CSWM

All CBCF boards

BCF converter

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

256

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.9 PCMI board of the BCF unit


5.9.1 Functional description
The functions used by the PCMI board are coding and decoding with detection of code violations, and management of CRC code multiframes implemented by the software. Whereas transmission alignment is generated automatically, reception alignment is done by frame alignment and multiframe alignment:

Frame alignment is lost after three consecutive incorrect words or three consecutive odd frames with bit 2 of time slot 0 equal to 1. This triggers the false frame counter and sends the alarm indication signal (AIS) to the system. Re-alignment is done when a correct frame alignment word is received, followed by the correct odd frame TS 0, followed by a correct frame alignment word. CRC multiframe alignment is lost if frame alignment is lost. Re-alignment is done when two correct multiframe alignments are detected separated by a time slot of n 2 ms.

The PCMI board uses the following alarms:

LOS: Loss of Frame Alignment AIS: Alarm Indication Signal NOS: NO Signal RRA: or RAI Remote Receive Alarm or Remote Alarm Indication SKP: SKiP indication received CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check error rate, for each CRC counter read FE: Frame Error rate, for each frame error counter

5.9.2 Physical description

The PCMI board is the PCM interface. It makes the physical link between the BSC and the BTS through the Abis interface. The PCMI board is the interface between internal PCMs and external PCMs. It controls the transmission and reception of frames. It has two PCM junctions (that is, two external PCMs linked to two internal PCM). The two PCM junctions of the PCMI board are controlled by a processing unit which also makes the link to the CSWM control board.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.9 PCMI board of the BCF unit

257

The PCMI board receives the following signals from the CSWM board:

The PCM bus carries clock and frame alignment signals, as well as transmission data (conversion of single-pole signals to two-pole signals). The O and M bus is a 9600 bit/s asynchronous serial interface. It carries control and board addressing signals, and insures data send/receive links.

The PCMI board, over a V11 interface, sends to the CSWM board reception data (conversion of the two-pole signal to single-pole signals), and the two reception clock signals.

Front panel

The front panel of the PCMI board has the following elements, see Figure 140 "E1 PCMI board" (page 258) and Figure 141 "T1 PCMI board" (page 259):

The green +5 V LED is on to indicate that the board power supply is ON. The yellow BIST LED is on to indicate that the self-tests are being carried out. The green RDY LED is on to indicate that the board is operating correctly. A RESET pushbutton is used to reset the board to zero. Two rows of seven red LEDs display the status of the PCM alarm junctions, with one LED for each PCM alarm. Two eight-pin connectors select operation in either NORMAL mode (one plug in "XL" position for transmit path and one plug in "RL" position for receive path) or in LOOPBACK mode for tests (one plug in "LP" position to connect the transmit path to the receive path).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

258

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 140 E1 PCMI board

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.10 GTW board of the BCF unit Figure 141 T1 PCMI board

259

5.10 GTW board of the BCF unit


5.10.1 Functional description
The GTW board is the gateway that adapts data between the BCF and the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

260

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

GTW board diagram

The GTW board receives the following signals from the BCF:

eight internal PCM signals the PCM clock signals the O and M bus signal the GSM TIME bus signal

It sends the following signals to the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3: six "private" PCM signals the PCM clock signals

5.10.2 Physical description

The GTW board includes:

a central processing unit with a microprocessor with:

512 kbytes of EPROM divided into 16 pages of 32 kbytes each 512 kbytes of static RAM divided into 16 pages of 32 kbytes each the serial controller of the microprocessor used for the O and M
bus

the SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) of the microprocessor used


for the switch-over logic

the peripherals: a two-channel serial controller to manage two interfaces with


the debug console

a two-channel HDLC controller to manage the O and M BUS


and GSM TIME channels on a PCM

the connection matrix read of the GSM TIME delay read of the GSM TIME data the silence register and the test register a register giving the source of a reset a register giving the cabinet number a dual-port RAM for activation of internal PCM drivers

a time base to supply, from the GSM TIME bus clock, the signals needed for private PCMs and DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 The time base has a local clock for private PCMs if the GSM TIME bus clock should fail.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.10 GTW board of the BCF unit

261

two FIFOs for jitter and phase adaptation of the eight internal PCMs from the BCF to the private PCMs of the gateway a 1616 PCM connection matrix which makes connections time slot by time slot A silence register sends the silence code on the connection matrix for time slots which are not used. A test register is used to inject and extract a test sequence on the PCMs. The board can loop the TS0s of each private PCM or totally loop all PCMs (reserved for testing).

a delay measurement between the GSM TIME synchronization and the GSM TIME flag present on one of the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 PCMs an internal PCM driver activation circuit Activation is programmable is done time slot by time slot for each internal PCM.

5.10.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of the GTW board has one connector and several LEDs. For more information, see Figure 142 "GTW board" (page 262). LEDs Four LEDs give information on the status of the GTW board:

The BIST LED is on to indicate that self-tests are being carried out. The +5 V diode is on to indicate that the +5 V power supply is on. The RDY diode is on to indicate that the board is operating correctly. The ON diode indicates that the board is active.

5.10.2.2 Electrical characteristics

The GTW board power supply is 5 V 5%. Consumption is 2 A, protected by a 3A fuse.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

262

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 142 GTW board

5.11 CSWM board of the BCF unit


5.11.1 Functional description
The CSWM board manages the BCF and contains the connection matrix. It is inserted in the BCF back panel.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.11 CSWM board of the BCF unit

263

CSWM board diagram The CSWM board receives six reference clocks of the three PCM boards of the cell, and supplies the reference clock signal for all PCMs inside the cabinet. It carries out cross-connection of the 16 internal PCM time slots, and also manages the O and M bus. It communicates with the BSC by means of a 64 kHz interface.

5.11.2 Physical description

The CSWM board includes:

a central unit built around a microprocessor with:

8 Mbytes of 32-bit DRAM (60 ns), four Mbytes of 8-bit flash


memory

one ETHERNET interface one asynchronous test interface (debug port) one asynchronous interface for O and M bus management one synchronous interface for O and M bus management on the
PCM channel

several internal timers for real time and timed periods

a watchdog inside the microprocessor a power supply monitoring device a device to discover the cause of the last board reset a duplex management device (active/passive chain) a time base which can be synchronized to one of the seven rhythms selected as input (six are from external Abis links, and one is from a local oscillator) a clock frequency measurement device This measurement system should check that synchronization clocks and the PLL output are correct. a 1616 switch matrix: connection of 16 32 time slots to 16 32 time slots a test loop device for TS0 a test juncture a silence juncture to send the silence code on the Abis PCMs an HDLC silence juncture to connect reception of HDLC controllers when they are not in service an HDLC O and M bus address juncture

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

264

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

an HDLC juncture to manage the HDLC O and M bus on the PCM channel an HDLC juncture for signaling with the BSC a J64 juncture for connection of the TIL

5.11.2.1 External interface signals

The CSWM board has the following interfaces:

ETHERNET link: connection with the RJ45 connector debug V28 link on the front panel with 9-pin connector link with the O and M bus internal PCM links to the PCMI boards for Abis management internal PCM links to the DSC boards for signaling concentration private PCM links to GTW for DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 management BDM links to the TTL test interface J64 link available on the front panel time base synchronization links to the PCMI boards link to the LEDs on the front panel display of PLL synchronization links

5.11.2.2 CSWM board front panel

The front panel of the CSWM board has various connectors and LEDs. For more information, see Figure 143 "CSWM board" (page 267). LEDs Several LEDs give information on the state of the board:

the BIST LED, on when the board is being tested the +5 V LED, on when the +5 V power supply is on the RDY LED, on when the downloading is correctly carried out the ON LED, on when the board is active the 0kbitM LED flashes when the boards of the BCF are communicating with the 0kbitM bus the Abis LED flashes when the communication has been established with the BSC the WDG LED, on when the watchdog is armed on the board

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.11 CSWM board of the BCF unit

265

the MRQ LED comes on when the board is ready to become master the MAINT LED, on when the board is in service mode (the watchdog no longer needs to be armed for the board to switch to active mode)

5.11.2.3 Choice of clocks

The CSWM board selects a reference clock out of six different possibilities. As there are not 6 LEDs on the display, the selected clock number is encoded in binary on three LEDs. If no clock is selected (code 000), the LOC LED is on to indicate the switch-over to the local clock. The state of the LEDs is controlled directly by the hardware, and it is the software that selects the clock source.
Table 12 Clock setting LOC NO CLK H0 H1 H2

CLK1

CLK2

CLK3

CLK4

CLK5

CLK6

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

266

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.11.2.4 Electrical characteristics

The CSWM board power supply is 5 V 5%. Consumption is 2.5 A (3.5 A max). Protection is by means of a 3.5 A CMS fuse. Metal parts of the board are connected to the mechanical ground.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.12 DSC board of the BCF unit Figure 143 CSWM board

267

5.12 DSC board of the BCF unit


5.12.1 Functional description
The DSC board concentrates (or deconcentrates) up to 15 LAPD signaling channels to (or from) a single signaling link between the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 and the BSC by way of the CSWM.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

268

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The DSC board can be configured in several ways. Here are some examples:

one 14-to-1 concentrator two 4-to-1 concentrators three 4-to-1 concentrators

The DSC board has a +5 V power supply and is protected by a 2A fuse.

5.12.2 Physical description

In addition to the processor, the DSC board has the following interfaces:

Sixteen HDLC controllers are connected to the PCM bus on the back-panel. Each HDLC channel is allocated one TS of the PCM. The 16 TSs used are consecutive. The O and M interface is available on the back-panel. Through this interface, the DSC board is the slave of the CSWM board. A test connector, available on the front panel, is connected to a V11 serial interface.

There is also a reset logic which allows reinitialization for the following three causes:

power supply turned on front panel pushbutton pressed reset command given over the O and M bus

5.12.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of the DSC has the following elements, see Figure 144 "DSC board" (page 269):

The yellow BIST LED is on to indicate that self-tests are being carried out. The green +5 V LED is on to indicate that the board power supply is on. The green RDY LED is on to indicate that the board is operating correctly. The RESET pushbutton resets the board to zero. The TEST connector is a nine-pin female connector.

5.12.2.2 Back-panel signals

Four types of signals are available on the back-panel.


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.13 SYNC board of the BCF unit Figure 144 DSC board

269

5.13 SYNC board of the BCF unit


5.13.1 Functional description
This board provides GSM time.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

270

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.13.1.1 Architecture

Each unit is connected to the following:

the GSM TIME bus a CSWM processor that supplies the reference time the O and M bus its counterpart board

5.13.1.2 Operation
Processor functions

The processor does the following:

controls the frequency-locked loop (FLL) manages switch over procedures enables communication with the CSWM manages GSM time

FLL management The reference time is generated by the external frequency 4096 kHz reference, a VCXO oscillator, frequency dividers, and frequency-locked loop (FLL). The processor emulates a high-gain filter (wideband) in the locking phase to ensure rapid convergence. When the FLL is locked, gain is reduced (narrow band) to obtain the stability specified in GSM recommendations. When the processor detects a loss of reference time, it stops the FLL and lock detection functions and controls the VCXO using the last correct value. Frequency is then matched to the VCXO value. When the 4096 kHz reference time is regained, lock detection and the FLL function are reactivated in the narrow or wide band, depending on the nominal frequency deviation. If there is no 4096 kHz reference at start-up time, the processor sets the control voltage in the middle of the accepted range and stabilizes the frequency by moving into the narrow band. Alarms To avoid untimely master/slave switch over, alarms are managed on front edge. This, status changing and event reports only occur on front edge. There are two types of alarms:

direct alarms, switching directly master/slave:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.13 SYNC board of the BCF unit

271

SW fail: when a software stop due to watch dog control is detected


(directly to exchange logic)

Clock fail: when the frequency clock generated by timing source


built-in VCXO has failed (directly to exchange logic)

software alarms, demanding a master/slave switching provided the slave is present without alarm:

H4M fail: loss of the 4096 kHz signal coming from CSWM ALTBUS: hardware alarm on the GSM TIME bus TIMEDATA: software alarm concerning the value of the GSM TIME
These two last alarms are bounded. Inter-board signal exchanges There are two types of signal:

synchronization signals used to synchronize master and slave counters switch over signals

5.13.1.3 GSM TIME bus

This bus connects the SYNC card to the GTW unit. It carries data defining the BTS "local time". It distributes three signals (differential pairs):

a 577-s signal a transfer clock signal a serial data signal

The master SYNC can read and write on the GSM TIME bus. It reads back the previously written data at regular intervals and compares the two values to detect malfunctions. In case of mismatch, the processor triggers switch over. The slave SYNC can only read the GSM time bus and uses it to synchronize its own counters on the master time.

5.13.1.4 CSWM interface

The CSWM supplies the reference time at 4096 kHz. The SYNC board detects reference time loss and informs the CSWM through the O and M bus. GSM time continues to be generated using a fixed VCXO voltage.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

272

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.13.1.5 O and M bus interface

It is used by the CSWM master and the two SYNC boards for communication. The following messages are exchanged: Status request The CSWM sends status requests when self-tests are run. The SYNC board sends back its status (master or slave), self-test results (BIST), alarms, and faults. Events When faults or alarms are detected, the SYNC board generates unsolicited messages and forwards them to the CSWM. Switchover request The CSWM can request the master SYNC to switch over and operate in slave mode. The master checks before switching over that its counterpart is present and that no alarm conditions exist. Depending on the results, switchover may or may not be triggered. Two responses are possible:

Master and slave have switched over. Master and slave have not switched over because of an alarm condition on the counterpart SYNC board.

GSM time request When CSWM sends time requests, two responses are possible:

GSM time, especially: T1, T2, T3, and TN (GSM 05.02 recommendation),

T1: hyperframe counter, 11 bits on two bytes:


0 0 0 0 0 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1

T2: module 26 counter, 5 bits on one byte,


0 0 0 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2

T3: module 51 counter, 6 bits on one byte,


0 0 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3

TN: module 8 counter, 3 bits on one byte.


0 0 0 0 0 TN TN TN

A flag is added (7E in hexadecimal) to detect a possible serial link loss.

no results available. The synchronization board that was polled is not the master.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.13 SYNC board of the BCF unit

273

Version request The CSWM can request the version reference and the SYNC returns the relevant number.

5.13.2 Physical description

The front panel of the synchronization board has the following, see Figure 145 "SYNC board" (page 274):

a green MASTER LED a red ALARM LED that indicates alarm conditions a yellow UNLOCK LED a VCXO clock test outlet

Upon start-up, the red LED comes on for five seconds. The active board is selected at random, the green LED on the master board comes on, and the LED on the slave board are off.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

274

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 145 SYNC board

5.14 BCF converter of the BCF unit


5.14.1 Functional description
The BCF converter is a dc/dc converter located in the BCF cabinet subrack.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.14 BCF converter of the BCF unit

275

5.14.2 Physical description 5.14.2.1 Input voltage

Nominal input voltage: 48 V or 60 V (40 V to 72 V).

5.14.2.2 Output voltage

Nominal output voltage: Un = 5.2 V 2%. Nominal output current: In = 12 A.

5.14.2.3 Parallel mode

The converter outputs are wired in parallel with the outputs of another, identical converter (in N+1 redundancy). In this way, a fault on one of the converters only reduces the available output current.

5.14.2.4 Protections

Input circuit The ON/OFF switch on the converter front panel cuts off the input voltage. The converter is also protected against inversion of the input voltage. Output circuit The converter is protected against output short-circuits and against overvoltage. When the output voltage reaches (120 4%) of nominal voltage, the output voltage passes to 0 V. Manual reinitialization by means of the ON/OFF switch on the front panel is necessary to return to a voltage close to the nominal voltage (if the source of the fault has disappeared).

5.14.2.5 Alarms

Two alarm loops can generate a signal in the following cases:

The output voltage is less than [Un - (10 4)%]. The output voltage is greater than [Un + (20 4)%].

5.14.2.6 Test points

There are four test points on the front panel of the converter, see Figure 146 "BCF converter" (page 276):

two connectors, protected against short-circuits, for output voltage measurement two connectors, protected against short-circuits, for measurement of a voltage proportional to the current delivered by the converter.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

276

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 146 BCF converter

5.15 PSCMD board of the BCF unit


5.15.1 Functional description
The PSCMD board controls simultaneous energization of the three 48 V/5 V-BCF converters. To do so, it uses the remote control inputs of the BCF converters received through a three-pole switch.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.15 PSCMD board of the BCF unit

277

The BCF converters must be in the "ON" position before the switch on the PSCMD board is set to the "ON" position. There are four jumpers, TYAL0 to TYAL3, on the side of the PSCMD board. They are used to set the TEI.

5.15.2 Physical description 5.15.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of the PSCMD board has a three-pole switch and three LEDs, one for each BCF converter. For more information, see Figure 147 "PSCMD board" (page 278).

5.15.2.2 Physical characteristics 5.15.2.3 BCF TEI configuration

The power supply voltage is 5 V, with a tolerance of 5%. BCF TEI numbering rule The BCF TEI number (Terminal Equipment Identifier) depends on the BTS rank within the network configuration. The commissioner must know the type of the configuration (star, chain, loop) as well as the location of the BTS in this configuration:

star configuration: all BTSs have the same TEI value chain and loop configurations: Increasing TEI values are assigned to the BTSs according to their positions in the chain or the loop.

By convention the TEI value 0 is allotted to the BTSs in star configuration and to the first ranking BTS in chain or loop configuration. BCF shelf number The BCF shelf number is obtained by calculating the 2s complement of the four low-order bits of the BCF TEI number (in binary logic exclusive-OR with value 1111).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

278

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 147 PSCMD board

BCF shelf number configuration site installation.

The BCF shelf number is defined at

It is defined by the four jumpers (TYAL0 to TYAL3) mentioned above. For more information, see Table 13 "TYAL jumper settings" (page 279).
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.16 Compact BCF (CBCF) module

279

The value defined is given in hexadecimal notation over 4bits (from its binary breakdown). According to the position of the jumpers, the following table gives the BCF shelf number.
Table 13 TYAL jumper settings BCF TEI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 BCF Shelf number f e d c b a 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Jumpers TYAL3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TYAL2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 TYAL1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 TYAL0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

TEI values not used for T1 external PCMs

5.16 Compact BCF (CBCF) module


CPCMI CMCF BCFICO CBP POWER ICO

This section provides a functional and physical description of the CBCF Module and of the following CBCF Module boards:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

280

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.16.1 Functional description

The CBCF Module performs functions common for a site and also manages its alarm management unit, the RECAL board. A S8000 BTS contains either a BCF (Unit or Cabinet) or a CBCF Module. A S8003 BTS contains a CBCF module only. The base common functions of the BTS are performed by two main CBCF Module boards: the CMCF and the CPCMI. The CMCF board performs the concentration, switching, and synchronization functions of the BTS. The CPCMI board ensures the interface between the external PCMs of the Abis interface and the internal private PCMs. Private PCM links connect the CBCF (through the CMCF) to the other BTS components. The CBCF also uses private PCMs for internal communication between CBCF boards. The boards and their functions are identified in Table 14 "CBCF module boards" (page 280).
Table 14 CBCF module boards Board* CPCMI CMCF BCFICO CBP Function ABIS double PCM link interface Concentration, routing, and synchronization Interconnection between the CPCMI, CMCF boards and external communication links Interconnection between CPCMI, CMCF, and BCFICO boards Quantity 1 to 3 1 or 2 1 1

* Legend: CPCMI Compact PCM Interface CMCF Compact Main Common Functions BCFICO Base Common Functions Interconnection CBP CBCF Compact Base Common Functions CBP Common Back panel

5.16.2 Physical description

Although the CBCF Module boards are fitted into a compact module, the CMCF, CPCMI, and BCFICO boards can be accessed from the front panel and replaced. The aim is to reduce the number of boards, to take advantage of the new technologies and to reach a high level of integration to allow software updating from OMC without any intervention on the site.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.16 Compact BCF (CBCF) module

281

Figure 148 "S8006 BTS: CBCF module" (page 282) and Figure 149 "S8000/S8002/S8003 BTS: CBCF module" (page 283) show the CBCF module front panel.

5.16.3 Mapping of BCF functions to CBCF functions


A BTS contains

either a BCF unit or a CBCF Module (for S8000 Indoor BTS and S8000 Outdoor BTS) a CBCF Module (for S8003 Indoor BTS)

See Table 15 "Table mapping of BCF and CBCF boards and functions" (page 281) for a summary of the mapping between the functions and boards of the BCF and CBCF.
Table 15 Table mapping of BCF and CBCF boards and functions Function BSC or BTS Interface (through PCM link) Module management and switching Synchronization of site equipment and GSM Time distribution Concentration of signaling channels Manages the alarm management unit, a slave of the BCF or CBCF Note: The ALCO board is an alarm management unit used with the BCF, while the RECAL board is used with the CBCF. Power conversion BCF Bo ard PCMI CSWM SYNC GTW DSC CSWM CBCF Board CPCMI CMCF CMCF CMCF CMCF

BCF Con verter

All CBCF boards

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

282

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 148 S8006 BTS: CBCF module

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.17 CPCMI board of the CBCF module Figure 149 S8000/S8002/S8003 BTS: CBCF module

283

5.17 CPCMI board of the CBCF module

Depending on the requirements, the CBCF Module can contain one to three CPCMI boards.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

284

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

This Compact PCM interface board handles two PCMs. Both PCMs can be used for the system Clock of the BTS.

5.17.1 Functional description

The CPCMI board ensures the interface between the external PCMs of the Abis interface and the internal private PCMs. This interfacing task corresponds to an electrical level translation and a frame format conversion depending on the kind of Abis link (PCM E1/T1 or HDSL). There are two types of CPCMI boards available used in accordance with the type of Abis interface:

CPCMI-E1 CPCMI-T1

ATTENTION

The CPCMI-E1 type applies only to the S8003 Indoor BTS.

The core of each board is generic and common to all, but each uses a different line interface. The CPCMI uses the n+1 redundancy scheme depending on:

the number of required TSs the drop and insert scheme the number of CPCMIs present in the package (three maximum) secured loop feature is activated or not

The functional characteristics of the E1 and T1 boards are summarized in Table 16 "Functions of CPCMI-E1 and CPCMI-T1 boards" (page 284).
Table 16 Functions of CPCMI-E1 and CPCMI-T1 boards Function Reception gain adaptation Extraction of the binary rate for transmission to the CMCF Reception and transmission buffer on two frames to allow frame alignment Transmission alignment on the CMCF clock Management of frame loss or doubling Management of alarms, signaling, and loop control Switch configuration for 120 Ohms or 75 Ohms CPCMI- E1 X X X X X X X CPCMI-T1 X X X X X X

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.17 CPCMI board of the CBCF module Table 16 Functions of CPCMI-E1 and CPCMI-T1 boards (contd.) Function Compliant with Recommendation G703 (HDB3 line coding) Compliant with the G823-G824 standard (jitter permitted) CRC4 Management Adaptation of transmission to the cable length Compliant with ANSI T1.403 and T1.102 (B8ZS coding) Management of frame format (SF or ESF) CRC6 Management (for ESF) Alignment of external T1 PCM rate and internal E1 PCM rate CPCMI- E1 X X X X X X X X CPCMI-T1

285

Synchronization

The timing signal is extracted from the PCM clock and sent to the CMCF (RCLK). The local time is sent to the CMCF if there is no PCM timing signal (RCLK = HLOC). The CMCF selects one signal from the six received (one for each PCM link) and redistributes it as a reference for all Abis transmissions (TCLK). This signal is also the long term reference used to create the H4M timing reference.

5.17.2 Physical description 5.17.2.1 Processing Unit

The CPCMI processing unit has a rate of 4 MHz derived from a 16 MHz external oscillator. It has a 128 Kbyte RAM capacity and a 16 Mb FEPROM capacity. O and M communication occurs using a LAPD on TS0 of the private PCM MIC0.

5.17.2.2 Front panel

The front panel contains the following:

one Reset button ten LEDs eight connectors

The CPCMI board is shown in Figure 150 "CPCMI board" (page 287).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

286

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.17.2.3 LEDs

The LEDs used on the front panel of the CPCMI board are described in Table 17 "LEDs on the front panel of the CPCMI board" (page 286).
Table 17 LEDs on the front panel of the CPCMI board Type Board state indicators No. of LEDs 1 1 1 State indicators of the external PCM link (Abis) 1 2 2 2 Label (color) BIST (yellow) +5 V (green) RDY (green) SKP (red) LFA (red) RRA (red) NOS (red) Meaning (when lit) The built-in self-test is running or is stopped with a default result. The power is on. The board is operating normally. The FIFO skip indicator is common to both PCMs. The frame alignment is lost. One LFA for each PCM link. The receive remote alarm. One RRA for each PCM link. There is no signal. One NOS for each PCM link.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.17 CPCMI board of the CBCF module Figure 150 CPCMI board

287

The next table defines the relation between the PCM alarms and the front LED status. According to the priority order, when the simultaneous alarms are detected, only the alarm with the highest priority is declared active.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

288

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description PCM alarms Definition LOS: Loss Of Signal AIS: Alarm Indication Signal LFA: Loss of Frame Alignment FE: Frame Error Priority 1 (high) 2 3 4 5 6 (low) NOS ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF CPCMI LEDs RRA OFF ON OFF ON ON ON LFA OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

CRC: loss of multi-frame alignment RAI: Remote Alarm Indication

Legend: NOS: No Signal RRA: Remote Receive Alarm

5.17.2.4 Switches

The switches are used to configure the board characteristics defined hereafter:

cable length line build out line coding mode framing mode Fs/dl feature

The position of each switch is shown on Figure 151 "CPCMI board: hardware switches" (page 289).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.17 CPCMI board of the CBCF module Figure 151 CPCMI board: hardware switches

289

The next tables summarize the settings of each switch of CPCMI board.

S3 switch:

Table 18 CPCMI board: S3 switch S3 switch (0:3) (4:7) T1 type E1 type =120: PCM1 120 O =75: PCM1 75 O =120: PCM0 120 O =75: PCM0 75 O

S1 and S2 switches:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

290

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Table 19 CPCMI board: S1 and S2 switches S1 and S2 switches MT1 0 0 1 1 MT0 0 1 0 1 T1 board Framing mode F4 not available SF (or D4) frame ESF frame F72 not available CRC mode none see CRC/RES T1 board Cable length 0 to 133 feet/0dB (0 to 40.58 meters) 133 to 266 feet (40.58 to 81.08 meters) 266 to 399 feet (81.08 to 121.61 meters) 399 to 533 feet (121.61 to 162.46 meters) 533 to 655 feet (162.46 to 199.64 meters) -7.5 dB -15.0 dB -22.5 dB T1 board =0 1: FS/DL disabled =1 1: FS/DL enabled =0 : AMI line coding =1 : B8ZS line coding =0 : CRC decoding disabled =1 : CRC decoding enabled E1 board Framing mode single frame multi-frame E1 board Line Build Out 75 O 120 O 120 O 120 O E1 board CRC mode none CRC4

S1 and S2 switches LS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 LS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 LS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

S1 and S2 switches FSDL AMI/B8ZS CRC/RES

5.17.2.5 Connectors

The CPCMI uses 12 connectors accessed from the following locations:

on the front panel (8) inside the board (4)

The connectors are identified in the table below.


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.18 CMCF board of the CBCF module Table 20 CPCMI board connectors Access Front panel No. of connectors 2 (0) Label XL0 LP0 Type Purpose Transmission connectors for PCM0.

291

A closed loop connection used for testing is attained by using one XL0 and one RL0 connectors. Reception connectors for PCM0. Transmission connectors for PCM1 A closed loop connection used for testing is attained by using one XL1 and one RL1 connectors. Reception connectors for PCM1. Debugging connector that is only available during tests. JTAG programming port used to program the EPLP prior to product delivery. Used for signals during nominal operation. This connector is plugged into the CBP. Power supply input. In this five-row connector, only rows A, C, and E are equipped with a power signal. The rows are staggered to allow the ground connection. This connector is plugged into the CBP.

2 2 (0)

RL0 XL1 LP1

2 Inside the board 1 1

RL1 P10 (Debug) P9 (JTAG)

Sub-D 9-pin male HE10 10-pin male Millipack1 60-pin female Millipack 1

P11

P13 (POW ER)

5.17.2.6 Electrical characteristics

The CPCMI board is powered by a nominal -48 V dc supply. A10 W converter on the board supplies the +5 V at a maximum level of 1 A.

5.18 CMCF board of the CBCF module

The CBCF Module contains one or two CMCF boards. One CMCF board allows operation in simplex mode, while two CMCF boards provide fully redundant duplex operations.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

292

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.18.1 Functional description

The CMCF Board performs the following functions:

synchronization of the BTS, through

selection of PCM clock PCM link frequency measurement input of external clock generation of the reference frequency for the DRX or eDRX or
DRX-ND3

generation of GSM Time

switching signaling concentration communication with the BSC and with O and M slaves (for example DRX, eDRX, DRX-ND3, CPCMI, RECAL)

Each CMCF board contains two dc-dc converters that perform the functions performed by the BCF Converter and the PSCMD board in the BCF.

Synchronization (SYN)

An oscillator provides the SYN function. The slave CMCF operates in a phase-locked loop so that its H4M clock is in phase with the master CMCF. This ensures that synchronization is maintained during a CMCF switchover. GSM Time The processing unit writes the GSM time (72 bits) every 60 ms and the value is stored in the matrix at a rate of one bit for each frame. Both the master and slave CMCF re-read the information in the matrix of the master CMCF, which ensures that GSM time is synchronized on both CMCF boards.

5.18.2 Physical description

The CMCF board contains the following parts:

a master processing unit (33 MHz) that manages

8 Mbytes DRAM 4 Mbytes FLASH one Ethernet link one watchdog 32 64 kbit/s/s HDLC links on one PCM one RS232 test link PCM switching matrix
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.18 CMCF board of the CBCF module

293

one EPLD with configuration registers I/O ports

a slave processing unit (33 MHz) that manages

one RS232 provisional link 32 64kbit HDLC links on one PCM one inter-CMCF 64 kbit/s HDLC link I/O ports

dc-dc converters with filters that provide 5 V, 12 V, and 3.3 V a SYN function that synchronizes itself on one of the six signals received from the CPCMI a system that synchronizes the PCM clocks and switchover of both CMCF boards a system that allows the synchronous transmission of GSM time on both CMCF boards a system that measure the frequency of clock inputs a 16 x 16 PCM switching matrix a "silence" juncture to emit the Abis silence code a test system that allows the verification of PCM time slots a 4-bit TEI register an 8-bit register that encodes the position of 4 mini-switches (WD Enable/Disable, Normal/Maintenance, etc.) a chain switchover system

5.18.2.1 Electrical characteristics

The CMCF is powered by a nominal dc -48 V power supply. The acceptable range is from 36 V to 72 V. The maximum power consumption of the board is 0.7 A. Two dc-dc converters in each CMCF board perform the following conversions:

48 V to 5 V 48 V to 12 V 5 V to 3.3 V

The 5 V power supply is required for most CMCF components, including both processing units. It has an 8 W power consumption.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

294

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The oscillator and DAC parts of the CMCF board require a 12 V power supply. The oscillator consumes 1 W during maintenance and up to 10 W in its preheating phase. The 3.3 V power supply is used strictly for the DRAM.

5.18.2.2 Synchronization

The CMCF provides synchronization for the radio part of the BTS. The CMCF hardware allows the selection of a clock from the following sources:

six clock signals taken from external PCM links (from the CPCMI) CMCF master clock

The long term stability of the external PCM link clock ensures the accuracy and stability required. A frequency meter function on the CMCF board measures the clocks to determine their validity. GSM Time channel The SYN function generates and distributes the GSM-time channel on the Private PCM. The GSM-time is the local BTS time, so the counters are arbitrarily set to zero after turning on the CMCF. The GSM time channel emission is dedicated to a special hardware system. Synchronization between master and slave processing units The master processing unit fully synchronizes the slave processing unit. Fully synchronous GSM-time emission is performed through a pulse signal sent from the Master GSM-time generation hardware system to the slave system. External synchronization connection An external synchronization interface is provided directly on the SYN part of the CMCF. The software selects the synchronization origin.

5.18.2.3 Front panel

The front panel of the CMCF contains the following:

a Reset button 16 LEDs two connectors

The Reset button allows a hard reset of the board.


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.18 CMCF board of the CBCF module

295

The front panel of the CMCF board is shown in Figure 152 "CMCF board" (page 296). LEDs Table 21 "LEDs on the front panel of the CMCF board" (page 295) describes the LEDs on the front panel of the CMCF board.

Table 21 LEDs on the front panel of the CMCF board Type Board state indicators LED (color) BIST (yellow) ON (green) ABIS (green) +5 V (green) RDY (green) RUN (green) State indicators of the external PCM link (Abis) OVEN (yellow) LOCKED (vert) HLDVR (red) CLK0 (green) CLK1 (green) CLK2 (green) LNK (green) TX (yellow) State indicators of the external PCM link (Abis) COL (red) RX (yellow) Meaning (when lit) The built-in self-test is running or is stopped with a default result. The board is operating and is providing a PCM clock. The Abis link is setup. The power is on. The board is ready to become operational. The applicative software is mounted. The OVCXO is in its preheating phase. The SYN function is synchronized. The SYN function is operating on a local clock. Indicates the clock source. Indicates the clock source. Indicates the clock source. The Ethernet link is established. There is a transmission on the Ethernet link. There is a collision on the Ethernet link. There is a reception on the Ethernet link.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

296

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 152 CMCF board

5.18.2.4 Connectors

The CMCF uses eight connectors accessed from the following locations:

on the front panel (two) inside the board (six)


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.19 BCFICO board of the CBCF module Table 22 CMCF board connectors Access Front panel Connector TEST Type Sub-D 15-pin male, high density RJ45 HE10 10-pin male HE10 10-pin male 60-pin male 60-pin male 60-pin male 10-pin Connector used to program the EPLD. Connector that plugs into the CBP. Connector that plugs into the CBP. Connector that plugs into the CBP. Power supply connector, which connects to the CBP. Purpose

297

Connector used for debugging, RACE access, BDM, test clocks, and OCVCXO. Connector used to connect the Ethernet link.

ETH Inside the board J3 BDM J4 JTAG P1 P2 P3 P4 (power)

5.19 BCFICO board of the CBCF module


5.19.1 Functional description
The BCFICO board allows the reception and transmission of external signals towards the CMCF and CPCMI boards. The coding of TEI signals can be set using the switched pull-down resistor inside the BCFICO board.

5.19.2 Physical description

The BCFICO contains the following:

six connectors on the front panel four connectors inside the board one switch register inside the board

The BCFICO board is shown in Figure 153 "BCFICO board" (page 299). The connectors are identified in Table 23 "BCFICO board connectors" (page 298) and the register is described in the Section "Switch register".

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

298

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Table 23 BCFICO board connectors Access Front panel Connector PCM0/1 Type Sub-D, 25-pin female Sub-D, 25-pin female Sub-D, 25-pin female Sub-D 25-pin male Sub-D, 3-pin male Sub-D, 9-pin male 10-pin female 60-pin female 60-pin female 60-pin female Purpose Connectors used for Private PCM links 0 and 1. Connected to J8 on the inside of the board. Connectors used for Private PCM links 2 and 3. Connected to J8 on the inside of the board. Connectors used for Private PCM links 4 and 5. Connected to J5 on the inside of the board. Connected to J5 on the inside of the board. +48 V dc power supply connector. Connected to the J3 connector on the inside of the board. Connected to the J1 connector on the inside of the board. Power supply connector, which is plugged into the CBP. Connecter that is plugged into the CBP. Connecter that is plugged into the CBP. Connecter that is plugged into the CBP.

PCM2/3

PCM4/5

ABIS PWR

RS232 Inside the board J2 J4 J6 J7

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.19 BCFICO board of the CBCF module Figure 153 BCFICO board

299

5.19.2.1 Switch resistor

The TEI signals can be configured by setting the switch pull-down register inside inside the BCFICO in the positions indicated in Table 24 "TEI Resistor coding on the switch register" (page 300).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

300

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Table 24 TEI Resistor coding on the switch register Signal name TEI00 TEI01 TEI10 TEI11 TEI20 TEI21 TEI0 Link to CPCMI0 to CPCMI0 to CPCMI1 to CPCMI1 to CPCMI2 to CPCMI2 to 2 CMCF Connector pin termination grounded on CBP grounded on CBP left unconnected grounded on CBP grounded on CBP left unconnected pull-down serial mounted with a switch on BCFICO pull-down serial mounted with a switch on BCFICO pull-down serial mounted with a switch on BCFICO pull-down serial mounted with a switch on BCFICO left unconnected. grounded on CBP 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 or 1 Logical code

TEI1 TEI2 TEI3 AOUB NAOUB

to 2 CMCF to 2 CMCF to 2 CMCF to CMCF_A to CMCF_B

0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 1 0

Legend: TEI: Terminal Equipment Identifier CPCMI: Compact PCM Interface CMCF: Compact main Common Functions CBP: Common Back panel

5.19.2.2 TEI configuration

With the TEI0 to TEI3 (S1) switches of the CBCICO board (see Figure 153 "BCFICO board" (page 299)) you can update the TEI configuration as described in the following table:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.19 BCFICO board of the CBCF module Table 25 TEI configuration TEI number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Key: TEI0 switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TEI1 switch 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 TEI2 switch 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 TEI3 switch 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

301

0 : Indicates that the switch is in the "ON" position 1 : Indicates that the switch is in the "OFF" position The grey line indicates the factory setting.

5.19.2.3 Interfaces specifications

The 48 V power supply is connected to the MAINICO board using power terminals screw:

M1 Mechanical ground connected to the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 PUPS output ground. M2 -48 V supply M3 0 V supply Each 48 V DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 power connector is protected by a 2A fuse.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

302

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.20 CBCF Back panel (CBP) of the CBCF module


5.20.1 Functional description
The CBCF Back panel (CBP) provides the interconnection between the following CBCF Module boards:

two CMCFs three CPCMIs one BCFICO

5.20.2 Physical description

The CBP contains the following six connectors:

two CMCF signal connectors

CMCF_A CMCF_B

three CPCMI signal connectors

CPCMI_0 CPCMI_1 CPCMI_2

one BCFICO connector

The CBP board and its connectors are shown in Figure 154 "CBP board" (page 303).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.21 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 module Figure 154 CBP board

303

5.21 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 module


5.21.1 Functional description
The module processes reception and transmission signals. The module has a receive sensitivity of -110 dBm or -108 dBm.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

304

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The Network Identification of BTS equipment feature consists in finding a way to differentiate from a system point of view eDRX, eDRX2 and DRX-ND3 for DRX; ePA and HePA for PA; CMCF phase 1 for CMCF phase 2 EDGE feature implementation. This feature also allows the addition of new equipment: eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3, ePA and HePA on sites without any modification of the configRef (DLU). The DRX-ND3 is designed with the same logical board as the eDRX. From a radio point of view, the DRX-ND3 is not able to support EDGE 8PSK modulation. The DRX-ND3 is not an EDGE ready hardware. The DRX-ND3 can be used together with DRX and/or eDRX. The eDRX2 is a S8000-CBCF module that can be inserted in any DRX slot of the cabinets. The eDRX2 provides the same features as eDRX does. The eDRX2 is not compatible with S8000-BCF.

5.21.2 Physical description 5.21.2.1 DRX front panel

The DRX front panel has the following elements, see Figure 155 "DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 module" (page 306):

a 26-pin power supply connector (PWR) a 66-pin connector for the private PCM (FH-PCM) a 50-pin test connector (TEST) a transmission signal output (TX OUT) a diversity reception signal input (RXD IN) a main reception signal input (RXM IN) 12 LEDs:

+5 V: Power supply RES1: (Reserved) ALA: Alarm DRX (or eDRX): DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 general status AMNU: AMNU status SPU: SPU or RX status BDT: BDT status TX: TX status LI: Ethernet connection OK
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.21 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 module

305

CL: Ethernet collision TX: Ethernet transmission RX: Ethernet reception


The LEDs for the AMNU, SPU, BDT, and TX can be in flashing mode while the corresponding software is being downloaded. For further information about the status of LEDs, see Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8003 Troubleshooting (411-9001-048).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

306

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 155 DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 module

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.21 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 module

307

5.21.2.2 eDRX front panel

The eDRX front panel has the following elements, see Figure 156 "eDRX module" (page 308):

a 26-pin power supply connector (PWR) a 66-pin connector for the private PCM (FH-PCM) a 50-pin test connector (TEST) a transmission signal output (TX) a diversity reception signal input (RXD IN) a main reception signal input (RXM IN) 8 LEDs:

FWR: FWR status SPU: SPU status DRX (or eDRX): DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 general status ALA: Alarm BIST: TBD LI: Ethernet connection OK TX: Ethernet transmission RX: Ethernet reception RESET:u sa
For further information about the status of LEDs, see technical documentNortel GSM BTS S8000/S8003 Troubleshooting (411-9001-048).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

308

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 156 eDRX module

5.21.2.3 eDRX2 front panel

The front panel of the eDRX2 is different from the one of the eDRX, and the LEDs are different too.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.21 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 module

309

The eDRX2 panel has the following elements, see Figure 157 "eDRX2 module" (page 310):

a 26-pin power supply connector (PWR) a 68-pin connector for the private PCM (FH-PCM) a 50-pin test connector (TEST) a 8-pin transmission/reception connector (TX/RX) diversity reception signal input (RXD IN) a main reception signal input (RXM IN) 8 LEDs:

PWR: Power supply, switched OFF if problem on power supply SPU: Blinks during SPU download, switched ON if any problem DRX: Blinks during FPGA download, switched ON when DRX is
operational

ALA: Software Alarm, switched ON if any problem BISTS: Blinks during BISTS execution, switched ON if problem LI: Ethernet link, switched ON when establishment connection is
done

TX: TX Ethernet, switched ON if Data Transfer RX: RX Ethernet, switched ON if Data Transfer
the front panel of the eDRX2 is different from the one of the eDRX, and the LEDs are different too. For further information about the status of LEDs, see technical document Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8003 Troubleshooting (411-9001-048).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

310

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description Figure 157 eDRX2 module

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.22 RX-splitter

311

5.22 RX-splitter

The RX-splitter amplifies a reception signal and splits it into several signals that it sends to the receivers. The RX-splitter consists of the following elements, see Figure 158 "RX-splitter diagram" (page 312):

5.22.1 Functional description

A two-stage, four-channel splitter splits the signal from the LNA-splitter into four identical signals. Four Low-Noise Amplifiers (LNA) each amplify one channel. Four resistive attenuators adjust the gain to the required value on each LNA channel. A remote amplifier controlling the power of the incoming signal. The DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 supervises the amplifier and sends the information to the BSC.

Each channel of the RX-splitter is connected to a different receiver. The receiver supplies the LNA of the channel to which it is connected by means of the RF cable. The four channels are therefore supplied independently of one another. Channels which are not connected to any receiver are not supplied with power, and so need not be adapted by a 50 O termination. Nominal gain on the four outputs is + 9.2 dBm (GSM 900/850), + 8 dBm (GSM 1800/1900).

5.22.2 Physical description 5.22.2.1 RX-splitter front panel

The front panel of the RX-splitter has the following elements, see Figure 159 "RX-splitter" (page 313):

Four RX connectors each supply a signal to a receiver which supplies them with voltage. An IN connector is used by the RX-splitter to receive the reception signal.

5.22.2.2 Consumption

The RX-splitter is supplied with +12 V dc + 5% or +5.5 V dc + 5% (GSM 1800/1900). Its maximum consumption is 40 mA (GSM 1800/1900) 50 mA for GSM 900and GSM 850. The receivers to which it is connected trip an alarm if this limit is exceeded.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

312

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 158 RX-splitter diagram

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.22 RX-splitter Figure 159 RX-splitter

313

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

314

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.23 Power system: Energy Supply Module (ESM) (ve-rectier type)


5.23.1 Functional description
The energy supply module (ESM) is an energy distribution system that supplies power to the different modules of the S8000 Indoor BTS. It is powered with single phase 220-240 V ac from the mains, and delivers a -48 V dc to the S8000 Indoor. The ESM is composed of a power controller unit (PCU), 5 680W rectifiers (one for redundancy), a climatic unit, and a battery pack. A common ac supply powers all the rectifiers through backplane connectors. The climatic unit is situated above the rectifiers and is composed of fans, a fan power board and air filters. These prevent the module from overheating. The ESM can be installed underneath, on the side of or at a distance from the S8000 Indoor. Two cables are situated on the right of the ESM, one from the mains, which powers the ESM, and one which is connected to the ALPRO board of the BTS, which reports the ESM alarms. The cable on the left of the ESM powers the BTS with -48 V dc.

5.23.2 Physical description

The PCU contains the following outputs which supply the modules of the cabinet:

Output 1, which supplies the power amplifiers and F-type converters Output 2, which is unused Output 3, which supplies the climatic units Output 4, which is unused One common 0 V output

PCU protections

The PCU outputs are protected by the following circuit-breakers:

Output current 1: breaker L1 (50 A), supplies BTS Output current 2: breaker L2 (unused) Output current 3: breaker L3 (15 A), supplies climatic unit Output current 4: breaker L4 (unused)

When circuit-breakers L1 or L3 are tripped, an alarm signal is generated. The power supply can also be cut off manually on either of the outputs. This is done using the circuit breakers on the front panel of the PCU.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.23 Power system: Energy Supply Module (ESM) (five-rectifier type)

315

Alarms

Various alarms are provided in the PCU to detect the following situations:

ac fault: when the ac supply is interrupted or is outside of the 172 V 276 V range (single alarm for all five rectifiers) dc fault: when the dc output supply is outside of the 40 V - 58 V (+ 0,5 V) range (single alarm for all five rectifiers) or if a temperature sensor is not properly linked to the PCU excessive temperature: the rectifier switches off when the maximum operating temperature is exceeded, and then starts again when the temperature has dropped back to normal (single alarm for all five rectifiers) discharged batteries: local power cut trips an alarm climatic unit fault battery circuit-breaker fault lightening protector fault

All Alarms are supervised through the ALPRO module, which is situated at the top of the S8000 Indoor. A cable on the right of the ESM connects the ESM alarms are therefore reported to the OMC as external alarms. The allocation of these alarms is defined by the client.
Figure 160 Front view of ESM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

316

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.23.2.1 680 W rectifier

The 680W rectifier for the ESM is a forced air convection rectifier with power factor correction. It operates on a single phase 220 V ac input voltage and provides a - 48 V dc output. Modification of any system settings is done through DIP switches on the controller module. These allow the user to limit the output power to 600W. An LED indicates the status of the rectifier:

PWR ON LED indicates that the rectifier is functioning normally.

An ON/OFF switch on the front allows the user to control the rectifier manually. The LED on the front of the rectifier is illustrated in Figure 161 "Front view of rectifier" (page 316). The table below details the LED signification.
LED Designation PWR ON/RFA Color Green/OFF Description Rectifier functioning normally/ Rectifier Fault

Figure 161 Front view of rectifier

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.24 Power system (six-rectifier type)

317

5.23.2.2 Batteries

The battery pack used in the ESM contains four 12 V batteries providing a total of 48 V dc. These provide a back-up in case of any short-term power cuts in the sector. The batteries typically provide the following back-up times in the following configurations:
Configurations S332 S222 S111 O1 Minimum Back-up Times 5 min. 8 min. 15 min. 30 min.

5.24 Power system (six-rectier type)


5.24.1 Functional description
This system is made up of a power controller unit (PCU) and a set of rectifier units (SRU), 6 rectifiers of 600 W each (one is for redundancy) for the S8000 BTS, 3 rectifiers of 600 W for the S8002 BTS and five for S8006 BTS. This system and the batteries constitute the dc energy distribution system used to supply the various modules of the cabinet. The Power System delivers a 54.6 V dc voltage which it generates from the Mains voltage for a 255C temperature (77F) of the probe under the batteries. The PCU has the four following separate outputs which supply the modules of the cabinet:

5.24.2 Physical description

output 1 (-) to the power amplifiers and F-type converters output 2 (-) to the climatic system fans output 3 (-) to the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 units output 4 (-) to the BCF (or CBCF), the user optional accessory, and the ALCO (or RECAL) board

The PCU also provides a common 0 V output.

PCU protections

The PCU outputs are protected by these breakers:

output current 1: breaker L1 (50 A) output current 2: breaker L2 (10 A, time delay)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

318

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

output current 3: breaker L3 (15 A) output current 4: breaker L4 (15 A)

When circuit-breakers L1 or L3 are tripped, an alarm signal is generated. A manual power supply cut-off is provided on all four outputs by circuit-breake rs on the front panel of the PCU.

Alarms

Several alarms are provided in the PCU, in order to detect the following situations:

ac fault: when the ac supply is interrupted or is outside the voltage range (single alarm for all six rectifiers) dc fault: when the dc supply is interrupted or is outside the 40 V to 58 V (+ 0.5 V) range (single alarm for all six rectifiers) or if a temperature sensor is not properly linked to the PCU or if a local bias fails. excessive temperature: The rectifier is switched off when the maximum operating temperature is exceeded, and then starts again when the temperature has dropped back to normal (single alarm for all six rectifiers). batteries on discharge (except for S8006 BTS) PCU protection device Load1 threshold

5.24.2.1 PCU front panel

The front panel includes the following, see Figure 162 "Power system (six-rectifier type 1)" (page 320) and Figure 163 "Power system (six-rectifier type 2)" (page 321):

four manual circuit breakers (PA, FAN, DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 and BCF) test points:

two points for type1 (PROBE1 and PROBE2) one point for type2 (PROBE1 only)

a terminal for connection with the battery cables six lights emitting LEDs

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.24 Power system (six-rectifier type)

319

The green LED (ON) indicates that the PCU is operating normally. The red LED (AL) indicates that there is a fault in the temperature
sensor circuit of the batteries or in the PCU. are operational.

Four other green LEDs indicates that the four outputs of the PCU

5.24.2.2 PCU top panel

The top panel includes alarm and monitoring connectors. The alarm connector (J4) is a male type, while the control connector (J5) is a female type. LEDs The LEDs give information on the status of the PCU rectifier:

The green LED (ON) indicates that the PCU is operating normally. The red LED (AL) indicates that there is a fault in the temperature sensor circuit of the batteries or in the PCU local bias system. Four other green LEDs indicates that the four outputs of the PCU are operational.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

320

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 162 Power system (six-rectifier type 1)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.24 Power system (six-rectifier type) Figure 163 Power system (six-rectifier type 2)

321

5.24.3 SRU description Input voltage


Nominal 230 V ac Range: 176 V ac to 264 V ac
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

322

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Output characteristics

Nominal output voltage is 54.6 V 0.2 V. The output voltage range is 40 V to 58 V 0.5 V. Protection against power surges is 59.5 V (+0 V, -1 V). Nominal current is 11A minimum for Vout = 54.6 V. The output power is constant (600W) for output voltages between 40 V and 58 V.

Alarms

Several alarm signals can be generated, in the following cases:

overtemperature missing module ac input voltage interrupted or not within 176 V-264 V thresholds dc output voltage not within 40 V-58 V thresholds ( 0.5 V)

An ac alarm leads to a dc alarm, but a dc alarm does not necessarily lead to an ac alarm.

Floating voltage control

The floating voltage leaving the rectifiers is automatically adjusted in inverse ratio to battery temperature. This floating voltage is necessary for an optimum battery service life.

5.24.4 SRU front panel

The front panel includes the following, see Figure 162 "Power system (six-rectifier type 1)" (page 320):

a manual circuit switch two voltage test points two LEDs

The LEDs give information on the status of the rectifier: The green LED (ON) is on to indicate that the rectifier is in normal operating mode, that is, the ac supply is within the appropriate voltage range and a dc voltage is supplied at the rectifier output. The red LED (AL) is on to indicate that the ac supply is within the appropriate voltage range but rectifier temperature is too high.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.25 Power system (seven-rectifier type)

323

5.25 Power system (seven-rectier type)


5.25.1 Functional description
This system must be powered with single phase 220 V ac with a connectorized cable assembly (ac cable with locking plug) exiting from the right front on the power shelf. A common ac feed powers all the rectifiers through backplane connectors. This system is an integrated power plant located within a single shelf, see Figure 164 "Power system (seven-rectifier type)" (page 325), that includes, from the left to the right side, the following:

a Distribution Module a set of 1500 W rectifiers a Controller Module

Rated until 3500 Watts, including n+1 redundancy, the power system will support up to seven rectifiers.

5.25.2 Physical description

The Distribution Module is a forced convection cooled distribution/disconn ect module rated at 65A capacity. Two sets of test points are provided for individual load current measurements. Load 1 test points provide a measurement of the SUMMATION OF CURRENTS IN CB1 + CB3. Similarly Load 2 test points for SUMMATION OF CB2 + CB4.

5.25.2.1 Front panel

The Distribution Module, see Figure 165 "DC cable termination load output protections" (page 326), has the following on its front panel:

four manual circuit breakers (CB1 to CB4) two sets of tests points (L1 and L2)

5.25.2.2 Connectors

Two mini sub-D connectors, located on the left hand side of the module, connect control and alarm signals. The alarm connector J4 is a male connector while J5, the control connector, is a female connector. All dc cabling is done directly to the Distribution Module. Figure 165 "DC cable termination load output protections" (page 326) illustrates the connection locations for the battery string and output load cabling. This is a view after removal of the Distribution Module cover.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

324

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The load outputs are protected by the following breakers:

Output 1: breaker CB1 (50A) Output 2: breaker CB2 (10A) Output 3: breaker CB3 (15A) Output 4: breaker CB4 (15A)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.25 Power system (seven-rectifier type) Figure 164 Power system (seven-rectifier type)

325

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

326

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 165 DC cable termination load output protections

5.25.2.3 500 W rectifier

The rectifier is a 500W forced air convection cooled rectifier with power factor correction. It is a plug-in module and operates on a single phase 220 V ac input voltage, providing a - 54.6 V dc output .Modification of any system settings is done through DIP switches on the controller module.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.25 Power system (seven-rectifier type)

327

The following visual alarm status indicator LED is provided by the rectifier:

PWR ON LED indicates that the rectifier is working GREEN, or a rectifier fail condition OFF

Front panel Figure 164 "Power system (seven-rectifier type)" (page 325) illustrates the Rectifier Module front panel status indicator LEDs. The following table describes system indicator signification
Table 26 Table system indicators LAMP DESIGNATION PWR ON/RFA COLOR Green/OFF DESCRIPTION Rectifier Good/Rectifier Fail

5.25.2.4 Controller module

The Controller Module, in tandem with the interface module, provides the system with control and alarm functions. The standard control functions include the following:

rectifier float level adjustment four selectable temperature compensation (TC) slopes five selectable battery charge control levels remote low voltage disconnect (REM LVD) remote low voltage reconnect (REM LVR) remote high voltage shutdown reset (REM HVSDR) remote temporary release (TR)

The standard visual and extended alarms include the following: low voltage disconnect (LVD) with adjustable levels low voltage (LV) battery on discharge (BOD) battery high temperature (BAT) thermal shutdown (THSD) system high current alarm (HICUR) fuse alarm (FA) control fail alarm (CTRL)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

328

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The additional alarms available only through the extended relay contacts are the following:

high voltage shutdown (HVSD) rectifier minor and major alarms (RFA MIN and RFA MAJ) ac fail alarm (ACF)

Front panel Figure 164 "Power system (seven-rectifier type)" (page 325) illustrates the Controller Module front panel status indicator LEDs. The following table describes system indicator signification.
Table 27 Table system indicators LAMP DESIGNATION LVD LV BOD HI CUR CTRL FA BAT THSD COLOR Red Red Yellow Yellow Red Red Red Red DESCRIPTION Low Voltage Disconnect Low Voltage Battery on Discharge High Current Alarm Controller Fail Fuse Fail Alarm Battery High Temperature Alarm Thermal Shutdown

Configuration Level adjustments can be achieved with a DIP switch that is front accessible. Other configuration parameters can also be set to pre-programmed levels through DIP switches which are only accessible when the front panel is removed.

5.26 GSM Integrated Power System (GIPS)


5.26.1 Functional description
This system is made up of a DC distribution and control unit (DCU), a set of rectifier units, rectifiers of 680 W each (one is for redundancy) for the S8000 Outdoor BTS, and an ac distribution unit (ADU). This GIPS and the batteries constitute the dc energy distribution system used to supply the various modules of the cabinet. The Power System delivers a 54.6 V dc voltage which it generates from the Mains voltage for a 25C temperature (77F) of the probe under the batteries.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.26 GSM Integrated Power System (GIPS)

329

5.26.2 Physical description

The DCU has the four following separate outputs which supply the modules of the cabinet:

output PA (-) to the power amplifiers and F-type converters output DACS (-) to the climatic system fans output DRX (-) to the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 units output BCF (-) to the BCF (CBCF/USER/RECAL)

The DCU also provides a common 0 V output.

DCU protections

The DCU outputs are protected by the following breakers:

output current PA: breaker CB1 (50 A) output current DACS: breaker CB2 (10 A) output current DRX: breaker CB3 (15 A) output current BCF: breaker CB4 (15 A) output current BATTERY: breaker CB5 (90A)

When circuit-breakers CB1 or CB3 are tripped, an alarm signal is generated. A manual power supply cut-off is provided on all five outputs by circuit-breakers on the front panel of the DCU.

Alarms

Several alarms are provided to the RECAL board by the power system:

AC fault: when the ac supply is interrupted or is outside the voltage range (single alarm for all five rectifiers) DC fault: when the dc supply is interrupted or is outside the 172 V to 176 V range (single alarm for all five rectifiers) or if a temperature sensor is not properly linked to the DCU or if a local bias fails. DCU protection device Load1 threshold Main breaker fault Lightning arrestor fault

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

330

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.26.2.1 DCU front panel

The front panel includes the following:

five manual circuit breakers (BAT, PA, DRX, DACS, and BCF) a battery temperature probe connector four green LEDs

The four green LEDs ON indicate that the DCU is operating


normally.

A green LED OFF indicates that the corresponding module is not


powered.

5.26.2.2 DCU top panel

The top panel includes an alarm interface connector. The alarm connector is male 15-point Sub-D connector.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.26 GSM Integrated Power System (GIPS) Figure 166 GIPS

331

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

332

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Figure 167 DCU module

5.27 Rectier
5.27.1 Functional description 5.27.1.1 Input voltage
Nominal 230 V ac

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.27 Rectifier

333

Range: 176 V ac to 264 V ac

5.27.1.2 Output characteristics

Nominal output voltage is 54.6 V 0.2 V. The output voltage range is 40 V to 58.3 V 0.1 %. Protection against power surges is 59.7 V. Nominal current is 12.45 A minimum for Vout = 54.6 V. The output power is constant (680W) for output voltages between 40 V and 58 V.

5.27.1.3 Alarms

Several alarm signals can be generated, in the following cases:

overtemperature ac input voltage interrupted or not within 176 V-264 V thresholds dc output voltage not within 40 V to 58.3 V 0.1 %.

An ac alarm leads to a dc alarm, but a dc alarm does not necessarily lead to an ac alarm.

5.27.1.4 Floating voltage control

The floating voltage leaving the rectifiers is automatically adjusted in inverse ratio to battery temperature. This floating voltage is necessary for an optimum battery service life.

5.27.2 Physical description 5.27.2.1 Front panel description

The front panel includes the following:

a manual circuit switch a green LED

The LED gives information on the status of the rectifier. The green LED is on to indicate that the rectifier is in normal operating mode, that is a dc voltage is supplied at the rectifier output.

5.27.2.2 ADU description


The ADU provides:

the AC input cable surge protection a system level circuit breaker for rectifiers power on/off and overload protection a circuit breaker for DACS power on/off and overload protection
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

334

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

EMI filtering a connector for the DACS

5.27.2.3 ADU panel description

The front panel includes the following, see Figure 168 "ADU module" (page 335):

three mains circuit breakers:

rectifiers 1, 3, 5 Load Circuit Breaker rectifier 2, 4 Load Circuit Breaker DACS Load Circuit Breaker

Mains cable

The right panel of the ADU includes the DACS cable connection.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.27 Rectifier Figure 168 ADU module

335

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

336

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.28 Battery remote controller


5.28.1 Functional description
For the battery remote maintenance function, the BRC is controlled through the ETC0 relay of the RECAL board and switches on/off the batteries according to OMC-R commands. The return on main power supply is done automatically by the BRC if the string voltage is equal or below a secured voltage threshold. Those measurements are coded and sent to the Analog Digital Converter (ADC) of the RECAL board (DTA0 to DTA3). One alarm may be sent by the BRC board to the RECAL board:

maintenance on/off alarm (batteries on/off)

ATTENTION

Indicates that specific equipment and specific software (such as specific software in the BSC) dedicated to Railway application is used and that therefore the feature is not available for all preliminary GSM users.

The battery remote controller (BRC) is requested to:

switch off the BTS rectifier. This operation will first check that the batteries are operational in order to avoid any loss of service. switch the BTS rectifier back on, when a safety non adjustable low voltage threshold has been reached or upon a remote command from the RECAL board (relay open).

The BRC controlled by the RECAL board, offers two new features for S8000/S8002 BTS equipped with CBCF module only:

the battery remote maintenance the battery status monitoring (will be available for GSM-R phase3)

Battery remote maintenance

The aim of this feature is to increase the battery life by performing periodic discharges. To realize the operation, the BTS rectifiers are switched off and the BTS is forced to operate on batteries. Then, when a given low voltage threshold is reached, the rectifiers are automatically switched back on.

5.28.1.1 Battery status monitoring

This feature will be available for GSM-R phase 3.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.29 Paging capacity increase - UI mode

337

5.28.2 Physical description

Due to the fact that the BRC is located in a rectifier shelf, see Figure 169 "BRC location" (page 337), maximum number of rectifiers on a S8000 Outdoor BTS is limited to five. In order, to respect rectifiers N+1 redundancy, the configurations are limited to six DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 for each cabinet. For S8002 BTS, the maximum number of rectifiers is three (N+1 redundancy).

Figure 169 BRC location

5.29 Paging capacity increase - UI mode

So far, paging command messages were sent by the BSC to the BTS using either the Multi Paging Command message or the data request message (both messages are sent using I frame on the LapD that is in acknowledged mode).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

338

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

The new feature allows the sending of the paging command message in a Multipaging Command message using a Unit Data Request message (message sent using UI frame on the LapD that is in unacknowledged mode) in order to remove dependency on RTD. This feature allows, at equivalent paging messages number, to better fill the downlink lapd bandwidth associated to the BCCH for paging messages and to decrease the use of the uplink lapd bandwidth. Hence it increases the lapd bandwidth associated to the BCCH for non-paging messages. Furthermore, it guarantees a large bandwidth for non-paging messages on the Abis interface, and thus contributes to increase the quality of service.

BSC lter

When the UI multipaging feature is activated, the value of the BSC filter has to be set to 105 paging /second in the bsc data config. This filter is the guarantee to protect the BSC against very high number of paging messages and most of all to avoid congesting the Abis lapd bandwidth with UI Multipaging command messages. A counter is added in order to know paging messages filtered by the BSC filter. The counter is provided whatever is the feature activation (MultiPaging UI mode or MultiPaging Command feature for instance).

Multipaging command - Cell lter

The UI Multipaging feature and the I multipaging command feature are exclusive:

As soon as the Multipaging UI is supported by the BSC and the TRX, the Multipaging message is sent by the BSC to the BTS using a Unit Data request message (UI MultiPaging message).

Hence, since all paging messages received from the BSC filter are sent to the BTS, there is no more filter at cell level.

In case the UI Multipaging is not supported either by the BSC or the TRX, the I Multipaging command is activated.

Engineering

It is recommended, at the introduction of this feature in the BSS, to have the paging repetition activated at the MSC level, in case of known transmission issues. Moreover, according to the network constraints, paging repetition modification at the BTS and multiple CCCH configurations can be considered.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.30 Band support on GSM-R BTS

339

5.30 Band support on GSM-R BTS

Up to BSS 15.1, the railways frequency band allowed for R-GSM is only 876MHz to 880MHz. GSM-R BTSs (S8000, S8002 and S8003) deployed so far need to support E-GSM frequencies from 880MHz to 890 MHz without hardware upgrade (coupling, DRX, PA). Indeed, due to BTS hardware constraints, the frequency bandwidth manageable is 876 MHz to 901 MHz (uplink). R-GSM BTS are equipped with duplexer only (no H2D for instance). From a hardware point of view:

Rail duplexer is limited to 921-946 MHz (downlink) that is 25MHz bandwidth Rail DRX is limited to 921-956 MHz (downlink) that is 35 MHz bandwidth

There is no new or modified parameter, counters or notifications but a modification of the behavior of the BSS concerning the GSM-R frequency band. The frequency band definition is the following:

876 MHz to 915 MHz: mobile transmitted, base received 921 MHz to 960 MHz: base transmitted, mobile received

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

340

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

5.31 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER

The IPM-USER is the module that manages the Abis over IP interface in an IP-equipped BTS. The IPM-USER is only available for the CBCF-based S8000 Indoor and Outdoor BTS. It is not available for the S8002, S8003, or S8006 models. The RIPM-USER is the redundant variant of the IPM-USER module. Each IPM-USER or RIPM-USER supports only one btsSiteManager object.

5.31.1 Functional description

The (R)IPM-USER is the interface module added to an existing cabinet in charge of translating the usual ABIS TDM flow (8 E1/T1 max) of the legacy interfaces of the BTS into IP packet over Ethernet. The IPM-USER module performs the following tasks:

carries an equivalent of up to 6 E1 (or 6 T1) Abis trunks. converts Abis traffic from PCM to packet-based traffic (IP over Ethernet) for transmission to the BSC and packet-based Abis traffic to PCM, to be forwarded to the CBCF. contains an internal 100BaseT Ethernet switch. manages IP, TCP, UDP, FTP, IPSec, and proprietary protocols associated with the Abis over IP interface. receives a timing reference signal from the IPG at the BSC, which provides a stratum-1 traceable clock to be used for BTS synchronization. provides a reference frequency to the existing BTS oscillator. The IPM oscillator gives the BTS a temporarily source of hold-over timing when the timing source at the BSC is unavailable.

5.31.2 Physical description

This section describes the LEDs, connectors, and the electrical characteristics of the IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.31 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER

341

5.31.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of the IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module has the following:

One reset button Ten LEDs Eight connectors

The reset button allows a hard reset of the module.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

342

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description Figure 170 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.31 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER

343

5.31.2.2 Interface description

There are eight connectors on the front panel of the IPM-USER/RIPM-U SER module, see Table 28 "IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module connectors" (page 343).
Table 28 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module connectors Port name No. of connectors Type The Debug Port of each core is a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet port, associated with a RS232 connection. The connector is a shielded RJ45 female receptacle with built-in LEDs. 2 SUBD HD 26 F connectors are used for E1/T1 connections for the GSM BTS cabinets. 20 pin standard SFP connector RJ45 connector is used for external synchro for the BTS cabinets (typically GPS) 20 pin standard SFP connector

Debug

Abis(E1/T1) Line SYNC (External synchronization) AGG

2 1 1 2

The debug port is intended only for point-to-point connections. Any equipment that accesses the IPM-USER/RIPM-USER through the debug port must be directly connected to the IPM-USER/RIPM-USER with no intervening network equipment.

5.31.2.3 Physical and electrical characteristics


Table 29 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER dimensions and weight Module name (R)IPM-USER Width (mm) 43.36 Length (mm) 334.17 Height (mm) 442.6 Weight (Kg) 2.2

Max per cabinet: 1 The IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module is powered by a nominal 3.3 Vdc. The nominal supply current is approximately 20A. The module has a local step down converter to generate the secondary core voltages of 3.0V, 2.5V, 1.8V, and 1.2V. Max power consumption:
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

344

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description

Spare slot: 50 W IPM: 25 W RIPM: 40 W

Input voltage: 3.3 V input supply voltage from EIPB floating -48 V from backplane

5.31.2.4 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER corporate LEDs behavior

To drive the LED state, it is necessary to add some components between LVTTL command and precedent schematic. To set the LED OFF, a method is to add a positive voltage on operational amplifier negative input; output is so forced to low level, transistor is open and the LED is OFF. Serial input diode blocks low level current from driving command, to avoid disturbing current regulation. Additional pull up and pull down resistors force LED status when LVTTL output is not configured (three state at power up).
Table 30 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER corporate LEDs behavior Green LED switched off switched on switched on switched on switched off switched off blinking blinking Red LED switched off switched on switched off blinking switched on blinking switched on or switched off blinking IPM-USER status sleep, unpowered or not inserted (default hardware value) or powered but SW not able to start-up, for example due to bad commissioning. starting, BISTs in progress - 1 to 2 (resp1) cores are in starting/bists state; other cores are OK module OK (should not be removed) 2 (resp1) cores are OK (not used) alarm state: module is NOK and may be removed and replaced - 1 to 2 (resp1) cores are in OK state; whatever state of other cores (not used) (not used) (not used)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

5.31 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER

345

5.31.2.5 IPM-USER/RIPM-USER specific LEDs behavior

There are ten LEDs on the front panel of the IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module:

One green LED (ON) indicates that the module is operating normally. One red LED (AL) indicates that there is a fault. Other eight status LEDs that are tricolor (red, green, amber), see Table 31 "Status LEDs on the IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module" (page 345).

Table 31 Status LEDs on the IPM-USER/RIPM-USER module LED name ACTIVITY A and B Color Green Red Signification One ACT LED per IPM core for Passive or Active Status: Green: The corresponding IPM core is active. OFF: The corresponding IPM core is passive. 2 SYN status LEDs (for active IPM core): OFF/OFF = init state, GREEN/OFF = synchronous ethernet mode. Reserve for future use. OFF/ON = E1/T1 mode, reserved for lab (TIPM mode). Blinking during convergence, solid state when locked. GREEN = TIPM (lab only) AMBER = Bus test (factory only). ON/ON = ABIS over IP mode, Blinking during convergence, solid state when locked. Color GREEN = OK, AMBER = HOLDOVER RED = ALARM. IBOS Service Channel Status OFF = at init, GREEN = blinking during authentication trial, then solid state when service channel ON, AMBER = blinking during RIPM sw upgrade, solid if Service channel down, RED = authentication failed. IPG service channel status OFF = init, GREEN = blinking during connection trial, then solid state when service channel ON, AMBER = during IPG swact, RED = service channel lost. OFF (reserved for future use)

STATUS 2 and 3

Green Red Amber

STATUS 4

Green Red Amber

STATUS 5

Green Red Amber Green Red Amber

STATUS 6 and 7

All the LEDs are OFF when the RIPM-USER is unpowered. All the RIPM-USER LEDs are amber during bists except for passive core. The following table applies for each LED control:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

346

Chapter 5 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 hardware component description LED_RED 0 0 1 1 toggling LED_GREEN 0 1 0 1 toggling Color OFF Green Red OFF Yellow

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

347

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description


6.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software presentation
6.1.1 Downloadable les
BTS software is divided into downloadable files and an onboard PROM. The BSC downloads these files through the Abis interface. There are two sets of files, BCF and DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3. Each set is arranged in a file catalog that contain the list of files and the files themselves.

6.1.2 PROM

PROM chips are read-only memory units used to store software. They are all installed on all BTS equipment boards.

6.1.2.1 S8000 BCF software

Boards serving the BCF are described in Table 32 "BCF software product names" (page 347):
Table 32 BCF software product names Board CSWM PCMI SYNC DSC GTW ALCO Software product name PE_CSWM_B PE_CSWM_L PE_BS_DTI_E1 or PE_BS_DTI_T1 PE_SYN PE_DCC PE_GTW PE_BS_ALO Software product type BOOT LOAD PROM PROM PROM PROM PROM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

348

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

6.1.2.2 S8000 BTS CBCF software

The software product associated with the boards and slaves of the CBCF Modules are listed in Table 33 "CBCF software product names" (page 348).
Table 33 CBCF software product names Board CBCF Module CPCMI RECAL CC8 Sofware product name PE_CBCF_B PE_CBCF_DLU0 PE_CPCMI_E1 PE_CPCMI_T1 PE_RECAL PE_CC8_1800 Software product type Boot DLU Code Load Load Load Load

6.1.2.3 S8002 BTS CBCF software

The CBCF software package includes the PROMs installed in the slave units and the CMCF software which divides itself into two parts called BOOT and LOAD. All the CBCF files are downloadable as listed in Table 34 "CBCF software product names" (page 348).
Table 34 CBCF software product names Board CBCF Module CPCMI RECAL Sofware product name PE_CBCF_L PE_CBCF_B PE_CPCMI PE_RECAL Software product type Load Boot Load Load

6.1.2.4 S8003 BTS CBCF software

The software product associated with the boards and slaves of the CBCF Modules are listed in Table 35 "S8003 BTS: CBCF software product names" (page 348).
Table 35 S8003 BTS: CBCF software product names Board CBCF Module CPCMI RECAL Sofware product name PE_CBCF_B PE_CBCF_DLU0 PE_CPCMI_E1 PE_RECAL Software product type Boot DLU Code Load Load

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6.1 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software presentation

349

6.1.2.5 S8000 BTS family DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 software

As listed in Table 36 "S8000 BTS family : DRX, eDRX, and DRX-ND3 software product names" (page 349), the software products vary depending on whether the BCF or CBCF is used in the BTS. DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 O and M software is used with the BCF. DRX COAM is used with the CBCF or BCF from V12 onward.
Table 36 S8000 BTS family : DRX, eDRX, and DRX-ND3 software product names Board DRX O and M/COAM Sofware product name PE_AMNU_COAM_L PE_AMNU_RSL_L PE_AMNU_B PE_SPU2G_EGAL1_L PE_SPU2G_EGAL2_L PE_SPU2G_1620_L PE_SPU2G_BIST PE_SPU2G_BIST_1620 PE_TX_L_COAM PE_BDT_L PE_TOOLS PE_AMNU_COAM_L PE_AMNU_RSL_L_C PE_AMNU_B PE_SPU2G_16410_L PE_TOOLS Software product type O and M AMNU LOAD RSL AMNU LOAD AMNU BOOT SPU EGAL1 SPU EGAL2 SPU 11620 BIST SPU BIST SPU 1620 TX BDT PL TOOLS O and M AMNU LOAD RSL AMNU LOAD AMNU BOOT SPU 16410 PL TOOLS

eDRX

6.1.2.6 S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 software

The software products AMNU, SPU, DLU, BOOT, TX, BDT and BISTs are listed below:

AMNU: It is the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 management unit. SPU: It enables level 1 radio communication with the mobile. BDT: It extracts the GSM TIME carried on the private PCM. TX: It manages and monitors radio transmission. it is installed on each DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 board. It defines the FH bus input from which the TRX reads data, and defines the transmission power to be used. it also forwards TX alarms to the CMCF and controls the power amplifier (PA). BISTs: Basis hardware self test programs of a BTS subsystem. An example is the AMNU BIST which tests the components of the AMNU such as memory.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

350

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

AMNU, BISTS, TX BOOT, BDT BOOT, and optionnally Cyphering ASIC softwares are installed in factory.
Table 37 S8002 BTS: DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 software product names Board AMNU SPU TX BDT Sofware product name PE_AMNU_L PE_AMNU_B PE_SPU2G_EGAL_2 PE_SPU2G_DLU_DCS PE_TX_L_GSM PE_BDT_L Software product type Load Boot Load Load Load Load

Table 38 S8003 BTS: DRX software product names Board AMNU Sofware product name PE_AMNU_COAM_L PE_AMNU_COAM_B PE_AMNU_BOOT_BOOT PE_BOOT_INTER PE_AMNU_RSL_L PE_AMNU_OML_L PE_SPU2G_1620_L PE_SPU2G_BIST_1620 PE_TX_L_COAM PE_TX_OM_L PE_BDT_L PE_TOOLS Software product type Load Boot Boot Boot Boot RSL AMNU Load O and M AMNU load Load Bist Load TX O and M Load Load PL Tools

SPU TX BDT

Table 39 S8006 BTS: DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 software product names Board AMNU Sofware product name PE_AMNU_COAM_L PE_AMNU_COAM_B PE_AMNU_BOOT_BOOT PE_BOOT_INTER PE_AMNU_RSL_L PE_AMNU_OML_L PE_SPU2G_1620_L PE_SPU2G_BIST_1620 PE_TX_L_COAM PE_TX_OM_L Software product type Load Boot Boot Boot Boot RSL AMNU Load O and M AMNU load Load Bist Load TX O and M Load

SPU TX

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions Table 39 S8006 BTS: DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 software product names (contd.) Board BDT Sofware product name PE_BDT_L PE_TOOLS

351

Software product type Load PL Tools

The eDRX information is not available.

6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions

BTS software is distributed among three major units, see Figure 171 "Software functions (with BCF)" (page 353) and Figure 172 "Software functions (with CBCF)" (page 354):

The DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 unit is designed to transmit and receive (modulate and demodulate) and manage TDMA frames on the radio channel. The CBCF and BCF manage their slave units:

CBCF: CPCMI, RECAL, DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3, CC8 BCF: ALCO, DSC, DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 Interface, PCMI,
TX, and SYNC

The TIL unit is used for in-factory testing of the BTS, and to configure, control, and supervise the BTS on site.

The following terms are used in this chapter:

BIST: Basic hardware self-test programs of a BTS subsystem subassembly. These tests validate a subassembly intrinsically, without disturbing the other subassemblies. An example is the AMNU BIST, which tests the components (such as memory) of the AMNU unit on the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 logical board. Self-tests: Global, functional test programs, which use several subassemblies in order to validate an assembly (such as the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3). These tests can be broken down into tests of more or less elementary functions. This may require external equipment (so the term may be misleading). Downloading: A process which consists of installing, in the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 (logical part), software from an external entity (terminal, Ethernet network, BSC, etc.). Loading: A process used to load, into the subassemblies of the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 (logical part), the software it requires for its nominal operation.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

352

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

The Network Identification of BTS equipment feature consists of finding a way to differentiate from a system point of view eDRX and DRX-ND3 for DRX; ePA and HePA for PA; CMCF phase 1 and CMCF phase 2 Edge feature implementation. In addition, this feature adds new equipment: eDRX, DRX-ND3, ePA and HePA on sites without any modification of the configRef (DLU). The DRX-ND3 is designed with the same logical board as the eDRX. From a radio point of view, the DRX-ND3 is not able to support edge 8PSK modulation. The DRX-ND3 is not an edge ready hardware. The DRX-ND3 can be used together with DRX and/or eDRX.

6.2.1 DRX, eDRX, eDRX2, DRX-ND3 software functions

It is downloaded by the BSC, configured and supervised by the BSC and the CSWM (BCF) or CMCF (CBCF) through a LAPD link and a serial link. It serves as a gateway between the radio channel and the BSC. It handles both signaling and voice for all the logical channels carried by a given TDMA frame. However, the eDRX2 is available only for the S8000 BTS with CBCF and applicable to BTS S8003. The module has four functions:

The AMNU (LAPDm, L3 RSL, L3 O and M) is the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 management unit. The SPU is a gateway between the radio network and the BSC. TX and RX manage radio transmission and transmission. The BDT manages the GSM TIME.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions Figure 171 Software functions (with BCF)

353

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

354

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

Figure 172 Software functions (with CBCF)

6.2.1.1 L3 O and M AMNU

This software unit centralizes the operating and maintenance functions:

initialitization and monitoring of BISTs connection with Abis and BCF downloading and software marking configuration
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions

355

defense and alarms tool functions transmission of GSM TIME to BDT, and of O and M to TX

6.2.1.2 L3 RSL

This software unit represents the Radio Resource (RR) and the radio measurements function (L1M) in the BTS:

radio link layer management dedicated channel management common channel management TRX management error handling measurement collecting measurement pre-processing (for power control by the BTS, and for call clearing and handover decision for the BSC)

6.2.1.3 LAPDm

This software unit provides the LAPDm radio level 2 protocol with the mobile.

6.2.1.4 SPU

This software unit enables the level 1 radio communication with the mobile to transmit and receive:

gateway between radio and terrestrial network (Abis) for the traffic channel multiplexing and demultiplexing of the logical channels on physical channels

6.2.1.5 RX

This software unit provides the radioelectrical reception function.

6.2.1.6 L3 TX

This software unit manages and monitors radio transmission. It is installed in each DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 board. It sets the transmitter operation mode, defines the FH bus input from which the TX should read data, and defines the transmission power to be used. It also forwards TX alarms to the CSWM and controls the power amplifier (PA).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

356

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

6.2.1.7 L1 BDT

This software unit extracts the GSM TIME carried on the PCMp (GSM TIME TS) for the BDT unit.

6.2.1.8 LAPD

This software unit manages the LAPD link level 2 protocol on PCM between DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 and BSC.

6.2.1.9 L1 O and M, L2 O and M

These software units manage the link level 1 kbit 2 protocol on private PCMs between DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 and CSWM.

6.2.1.10 Network ID

The BTS detects the type of DRX and PA during connection with respect to the BCF and the DRX. Note the following restrictions:

If a DRX is not yet connected to the BCF, its type is set to "DRX type" until it is connected. If a PA is not yet connected to the DRX, its type is set to "PA type" until it is connected. If a fault beginning has been sent on the DRX type (or PA type) of equipment, because the real equipment type was unknown, the fault ending must be sent on a DRX or PA type, even if the DRX or PA have connected themselves between the fault begin and fault end.

6.2.1.11 Defense

The DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 board carries out no defense actions by itself.

6.2.2 BCF software functions

The Base Common Functions (BCF) unit is located in the main cabinet. It is downloaded by the BSC. It provides the interface between the BTS and its Base Station Controller (BSC). It also handles the following functions:

It sets the signaling channel and physical path concentration. It generates and distributes the GSM time to all BTS units. It monitors and detects all BTS alarms. By using the event reporting procedure, it correlates some BTS alarms in order to provide to the BSC a logical state of the BTS. The DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 is still monitored partly by the BCF (TX) and partly by the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 (AMNU/SPU). It provides local protection of some BTS modules, by implementing redundant equipment units.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions

357

6.2.2.1 Synchronization unit level 3 layer (L3-SYN)

This software unit is installed in each synchronization unit. It monitors synchronization board switching, and sends a message to the CSWM whenever switching occurs.

6.2.2.2 Alarm unit level 3 layer (L3-ALCO)

This software unit is installed in the ALCO board. It makes it possible to set the board alarm loops, under CSWM control. It sends all alarm and control loop states to the CSWM.

6.2.2.3 Dual PCM link unit level 3 layer (L3-PCMI)

This software is installed in each PCMI board. It makes it possible to configure the board, and monitors the board and the two associated PCM link operations. It also carries out signaling to the CSWM when a failure occurs.

6.2.2.4 Concentrator unit level 3 layer (L3-DSC)

This software unit is installed in each DSC board and enables board configuration. It concentrates the signaling of several DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 units onto the BSC signaling channel, and conversely separates BSC signaling and routes it towards the DRX or eDRX or DRX-ND3 units.

6.2.2.5 L1 BDT

This level interfaces the GSM TIME bus with a dedicated TS of all private PCM links.

6.2.2.6 RACE

This level formats into frames the character flow coming from RACE, and routes these frames towards the OMC.

6.2.2.7 LAPD management (LAPD)

This software unit manages a LAPD link between the CSWM and the BSC through the DSCs.

6.2.2.8 L3 O and M CSWM

The main functions of this layer are the following:

conversion between GSM entities and hardware entities configuration of the internal PCM links configuration of the FH bus supervision of the different slave equipments (PCMI, DSC, TX, ALCO, SYNC, GTW, switching matrix, O and M bus) management of the duplex

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

358

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

6.2.2.9 Defense

The BCF contains several defense mechanisms:

paired units operating in active/standby mode:

two synchronization boards (SYNC) two gateway boards (GTW) two control and switching boards (CSWM). In order to provide
switching in warm duplex mode, the standby chain is updated in real time.

redundant units:

one DSC board can be reserved for redundant use one PCM interface bord can be reserved for redundant use. 6.2.3 CBCF software functions

CBCF Software is based on a COAM software architecture, which is composed of three main parts:

common software for various BTS products

OS Kernel O and M Kernel

BTS-specific software dedicated to a BTS product

OS-specific O and M-specific

slave managers

The CBCF software manages the following O and M functions: PCM management configuration and supervision management software management synchronization management test management duplex management

6.2.3.1 PCM management

This function selects one of the incoming PCMs for communication with the BSC. It then routes PCM TSs to the appropriate equipment in the BTS as the BSC requests. Other PCM TSs are routed toward another PCM to allow drop and insert functionality.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions

359

This function also ensures LAPD concentration. Secured loop function Secured loop function is an enhancement of Drop and Insert mode. In case of network transmission failure (PCM or Optical Fibre or Microwave links, HDSL modems) in BTS loop, secured loop feature ensures that the ongoing calls are maintained, signaling links are maintained and automatically switched over on the redundant path. Secured loop function is based on:

duplicated BSC PCM interfaces (thanks to E1 SLTI boards), duplicated BTS CPCMI boards, duplicated BTS CMCF boards (with S4 commissioning switch in the "ON" position on both passive and active CMCF boards, and with dedicated Secured Loop CBCF software), duplicated PCM links through the transmission network (loop with one PCM only), a dedicated 64 Kbit/s TS (TS 31), called Shared Time Slot (STS), on each PCM link.

The selection of the active path is performed through a dedicated protocol carried on the STS.

6.2.3.2 Configuration and supervision management

This function translates the OML Abis model into a physical model to offer a standardized configuration and supervision to the BSC. The CBCF acts as an Abis front end toward the BSC for configuration and supervision purposes. It is the only link for configuration messages coming from the BSC. The CBCF uses the CBCF/DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 protocol to drive any actions concerning the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3.

6.2.3.3 Software management

The CBCF performs software management for the BTS and provides the only link for downloading messages from the BSC. When a RECAL or CPCMI board is downloaded, the CBCF/Slave protocol is used.

6.2.3.4 Synchronization management

The CBCF builds the GSM time and provides it to the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 through a TS or a private PCM. External PCMs ensure long term stability.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

360

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

6.2.3.5 Test management

The CBCF coordinates all BTS tests. When an installation or maintenance action affects a DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3, the DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 is driven by the CBCF using the CBCF/DRX or eDRX or eDRX2 or DRX-ND3 Protocol.

6.2.3.6 Duplex Management 6.2.4 TIL software functions

The COAM software manages a cold and hot duplex modes. TIL is an application running on a PC in the WINDOWS 95 and WINDOWS 2000 environment. The TIL application is connected to the BCF or CBCF through an ethernet connection. The TIL is designed to do the following:

validate the BTS in the factory install the BTS site perform diagnostics of hardware problems check equipment substitution check the equipment extension within a cabinet

6.2.4.1 Ethernet

This unit is installed in the PC. It provides the level 1 and 2 communication layer. Level 1 is a hardware driver. The level 2 protocol is an LAPD UI frame. TCP-IP protocol is used.

6.2.4.2 L3 TIL

This software unit manages all the boards of the BTS by establishment of a network with all the GSM entities of the BTS. It integrates the factory and installation test environment. The TIL takes the following testing into consideration:

the conformity of the cabinet configuration the validity of the data links the external BTS PCM the connectors in the cabinet for cabinet extensions

6.2.5 TML IPM web server

The local maintenance tool IP module (TML IPM) web server provides an OAM user interface for the TML. The TML client GUI is accessible either through generic web browser software running on the TML
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6.2 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS software functions

361

server, or remotely through the IBOS function on the OMC-R. The TML IPM web server is documented in more detail in Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide (411-9001-051).

6.2.5.1 Functions

The TML IPM server performs the following functions:

IPM Commissioning Display - displays the IPM commissioning parameters IPM Commissioning Update - modifies the commissioning parameters Alarms status display - displays the HW alarms Core/Ambient Temperature - displays the core and ambient temperature Counters status display - displays the IPM counters PLs marking display - displays the marking of IPM PLs BISTs status display - displays the BISTs execution result PCM Loop Test - performs a loop test on PCM links at FPGA level. The result will be available at ICM TIL side Oscillator Test - performs a test on the calibration of IPM oscillator IPM Reset/Switch-over - makes a request for reset/restart of the IPM and allows to switch from active to passive Switch Ethernet Reset - makes a request for reset of the Ethernet switch Ping IP Address - performs a ping from IPM of the specified IP address

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

362

Chapter 6 S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 software component description

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

363

Chapter 7 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna


This feature optimizes the TDMA mapping on TRX algorithm: it allows to allocate BCCH on a defined TEI such as to cable the combiner filter on a defined physical port (always the same feeder cable carrying by default the BCCH signal).

7.1 Functional description

A single antenna can be shared by GSM900 and UMTS900 bands .


Figure 173 GSM900 TRX1 and UMTS TRX2

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

364

Chapter 7 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna

The main usage of this feature is to allow feeder and antennae sharing between GSM 900 MHz and UMTS 900 MHz. In such a case, dedicated frequencies can be allocated to the GSM BCCH, that need to be exclusive and different from the UMTS frequencies. A guardband of several MHz is required between the BCCH frequencies and the UMTS frequencies. Additional external transmit filters will allow, within the guardband separation, to filter out each others spurious signals such that both systems can then be combined into a single feeder with minimal RF performance impacts. The feature then allows the BCCH to be physically allocated to the feeder and antennae with wich the UMTS signal is combined, hence avoiding TCH frequencies to become mixed up with UMTS signal. Only in a fault scenario (for example, a defective radio hardware), would the BCCH be reallocated to another TRX. Without this feature, a TCH may otherwise be randomly allocated to the TX1, that could generate the loss of the TCH transmit if the frequencies are filtered out by the external custom TX filter. Another use of this feature is, when using several antennas for a single sector, to secure the BCCH to the highest antenna to allow for best coverage.

Note: The feature only concerns the software side, but external OEM
TX filters and combiners are required.

7.2 Specication

A BCCH TDMA is always mapped on the GSM TRX, when GSM and UMTS TRXs are using the 2-way combiner antenna. There is only one 2-way combiner antenna configured in a cell. A new class-2 parameter, GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal, is introduced at a cell level specifying the TEI value of the TRX when the GSM TRX and the UMTS TRX are configured using the 2-way combiner antenna. During the TRX and TDMA mapping, the following are performed by the supervision module:

the TEI specified by the operator is mapped to the BCCH TDMA. the rest of the TRXs and TDMAs are mapped as per the existing algorithm.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

7.2 Specification

365

7.2.1 Behavior during the cell (BTS) lock/unlock

When the cell (BTS) is unlocked, the behavior of the TRX TDMA mapping in the supervision is as follows:

If the TEI specified by the operator GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal, comes up and is available for mapping among the vital number of TRXs (as mentioned by an exiting parameter MinNbOfTdma, under BTS object) awaited by the SPR.

The BCCH TDMA is mapped to the TRX whose TEI value is


algorithm.

mentioned by the new parameter GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal.

The remaining TRXs and TDMAs are mapped as per the existing

If the TEI specified by the operator, GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal, does not come up and is not available for mapping among the vital number of TRXs awaited by SPR.

The TRX and TDMA mapping for the vital number of TRXs is
performed as per the existing algorithm.

A degraded state change (enabled/degrade) is triggered on the

BCCH TDMA. And on display dynamic data a new state is added to display the degraded status. TDMA is degraded, with the cause BCCH TDMA mapped to TEI different from operator specified. up and is available for mapping:

A notification (1063) is raised to OMC, informing that the BCCH

Once the TRX with TEI value GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal, comes The BCCH TDMA is unmapped from its previous TRX. The BCCH TDMA is mapped to the GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiV
alTEI.

Such mapping results in the cell outage for a momentary period


and is acceptable. (enabled) state.

A state change is triggered on the BCCH TDMA to the normal A notification (1063) is raised to the OMC, informing the reason
for this outage as Bcch tdma remapped to the GSM TRX configured/combined with UMTS trx using the Type2 combined antenna. A new cause BCCH TDMA remapped to operator specified TEI is added to 1063 notification.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

366

Chapter 7 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna

7.2.2 Behavior when the specied TEI goes down

If the TEI specified by the parameter GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal, goes down, faulty, or reset for some reason, the TDMA and TRX mapping is redone as per the existing algorithm in the SPR. As the regular mapping is performed, the BCCH TDMA is mapped to the TEI which is not specified by the GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal parameter. A degraded state change (enabled/degrade) is triggered on the BCCH TDMA, and on display dynamic data, a new state is added to display the degraded status. A notification (1063) is raised to OMC, informing that the BCCH TDMA is degraded, with the cause BCCH TDMA mapped to TEI different from operator specified.

7.2.3 Behavior when the specied TEI comes up

The behaviour when the TEI specified by GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal, comes up and is available for mapping as explained in the section 7.2.1 Behavior during the cell (BTS) lock/unlock (page 365). If no TEI specified by the parameter GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal, which is the default value, the TDMA and TRX mapping is done as per the current existing algorithm in the SPR. No special checks are performed. If an invalid TEI is specified by the parameter GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiV al, then the TDMA and TRX mapping is done as per the current existing algorithm in the SPR. No special checks are performed.

7.2.4 Behavior when no TEI is specied (empty value at MMI)

7.2.5 Behavior when invalid TEI is specied on the MMI

7.3 Feature locking

This feature is eligible for feature lock mechanism. A specific RFF-35265: GSM-UMTS combination on same antenna, feature lock is created at OMC-R. In case of no valid feature license, the following actions must be forbidden on the involved BSS.

Setting a value to the new parameter GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal. Build BDA with a non-empty value for the parameter GsmUmtsCom bBcchTeiVal.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

7.3 Feature locking

367

Reset BDA (online, offline) with a non-empty value for the parameter GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal. Unlock TRX, Bts, BtsSM objects with a non-empty value for the parameter GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal.

During license verification only working objects must be taken into account (in other words, the object must be unlocked, all its parents must be unlocked and related BSC must be built). A new error message has been added on semantic check failure on setting the new GsmUmtsCombBcchTeiVal parameter. No valid GSM-UMTS combination license available to perform this action. The use of the feature is controlled by the OMC-R and is locked by default. In order to un-lock the feature, a key is needed for each OMC-R. These keys are provided by Nortel against a proof of purchasing (either a Purchase Order or Contract). On the license verification, to set a value for the new parameter the respective BTS needs to be locked.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

368

Chapter 7 GSM900-UMTS900 combination on the same antenna

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals 411-9001-063 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 Fundamentals


Release: 18.0 PC2 Publication: 411-9001-063 Document revision: 18.03 Document release date: 22 January 2010 Copyright 1999-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved. While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

To provide feedback or to report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback. www.nortel.com

S-ar putea să vă placă și